CATERPILLAR 6090 RH400 Hydraulic Shovel Operating Instruction Manual - PDF DOWNLOAD

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400

Hydraulic Shovel 6090 / RH400 No. Bucyrus HEX GmbH

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400

Published by:

Bucyrus HEX GmbH Dept. 2530 – Documentation D-44149 Dortmund, Karl-Funke-Straße 36 Tel. 49 (0) 231 922-4340 Fax 49 (0) 231 922-5340 Email: BucyHEX-Dokumentation@cat.com https://mining.cat.com www.bucyrus-hex.com

© Copyright Bucyrus HEX GmbH 2011. The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this manual / file as well as the communication of its content to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design.

Printed in Germany

ii

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400

The Bucyrus HEX operating manual is in 6 sections; the sections are designed for different target groups: Operating instructions

Target group

Part 1 INTRODUCTION FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 2 OPERATION

Operating personnel The operating personnel must have knowhow relevant to the operation and the application of this or comparable machines.

Part 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING Part 4 REPAIR WORK

Inspection and servicing personnel The inspection and servicing personnel must have know-how relevant to the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

Repair personnel The repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to the repair of this or comparable machines.

Part 5 ANNEX

Part 6 INDEX

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

iii

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400

iv

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION __________________________________________________________________ 1-1 PREFACE _______________________________________________________________________ 1-3 About this Operating Instructions ____________________________________________________ 1-3 Further machine documentation _____________________________________________________ 1-3 WARRANTY______________________________________________________________________ 1-4 FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS _____________________________________________ 1-5 Warnings and symbols ____________________________________________________________ 1-5 DESIGNATED USE, UNAUTHORIZED USE ____________________________________________ 1-6 Noise emission information _________________________________________________________ 1-7 Vibration information ______________________________________________________________ 1-7 ORGANIZATIONAL MEASURES _____________________________________________________ 1-8 Selection and qualification of personnel; basic responsibilities______________________________ 1-9 Safety instructions governing specific operational phases _________________________________ 1-9 Special work in conjunction with utilization of the machine and maintenance and repairs as well as troubleshooting during work; disposal of parts and consumables___________________________ 1-10 Warning of special dangers________________________________________________________ 1-11 Gas, dust, steam and smoke_______________________________________________________ 1-11 Hydraulic equipment _____________________________________________________________ 1-12 FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD____________________________________________________ 1-13 NOTES_________________________________________________________________________ 1-15 2 OPERATION _____________________________________________________________________ 2-1 OPERATION - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS _______________________________________________ 2-3 Operating Instructions, where to store it in the driver’s cab ________________________________ 2-4 FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD_____________________________________________________ 2-5 DESCRIPTION OF THE HYDRAULIC SHOVEL __________________________________________ 2-6 Hydraulic shovel layout ____________________________________________________________ 2-7 Undercarriage ___________________________________________________________________ 2-8 Superstructure___________________________________________________________________ 2-8 Drive __________________________________________________________________________ 2-8 Hydraulic system _________________________________________________________________ 2-8 Control and Monitoring Platform (CAMP) ______________________________________________ 2-8 Board-Control-System (BCS) _______________________________________________________ 2-9 Demand control / Zero-flow regulation ________________________________________________ 2-9 Automatic reset to idling ___________________________________________________________ 2-9 Electrical system _________________________________________________________________ 2-9 Signs _________________________________________________________________________ 2-10 Entering and leaving the machine, Safety instructions ___________________________________ 2-18 Access ladder lighting ____________________________________________________________ 2-18 Swinging ladder_________________________________________________________________ 2-19 Folding ladder (optional) __________________________________________________________ 2-20 Emergency exit in driver’s cab and escape ladder ______________________________________ 2-21 Switching the cab interior lighting on and off___________________________________________ 2-22 Switching the maintenance lights on and off ___________________________________________ 2-23 BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

v

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Table of contents Emergency shut-off function _______________________________________________________ 2-24 Shutting off the supply voltage (battery main switch) ____________________________________ 2-25 Driver’s seat ___________________________________________________________________ 2-26 Reducing operators exposure to vibrations____________________________________________ 2-28 Trainer's / instructor's seat ________________________________________________________ 2-28 Windscreen washer______________________________________________________________ 2-28 Fire extinguisher ________________________________________________________________ 2-29 Automatic fire-extinguishing system (optional) _________________________________________ 2-30 Harness (optional) _______________________________________________________________ 2-31 MONITORING, WARNING AND CONTROL ELEMENTS __________________________________ 2-34 Engine 1 (LH), control and monitoring________________________________________________ 2-41 Engine 2 (RH), control and monitoring _______________________________________________ 2-43 PUTTING THE MACHINE INTO OPERATION __________________________________________ 2-62 Reducing the operator's exposure to noise____________________________________________ 2-62 Refuelling _____________________________________________________________________ 2-62 Back-up heating (option), filling in fuel _______________________________________________ 2-63 Service station (tanklift) ___________________________________________________________ 2-63 Switching the electrical system on and off ____________________________________________ 2-69 Engines, emergency shut-off_______________________________________________________ 2-69 Preheating system for engine and hydraulic oil (optional)_________________________________ 2-70 Fuel preheating system (optional) ___________________________________________________ 2-71 STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINES ___________________________________________ 2-72 Starting the engines _____________________________________________________________ 2-72 Starting the left-hand engine _______________________________________________________ 2-72 Starting the right-hand engine ______________________________________________________ 2-72 Engines – adjusting the speed _____________________________________________________ 2-73 Starting the engines at low temperatures _____________________________________________ 2-73 Shutting off the engines___________________________________________________________ 2-74 Shutting off the left-hand engine ____________________________________________________ 2-74 Shutting off the right-hand engine ___________________________________________________ 2-74 AIR CONDITIONER (OPTIONAL) ____________________________________________________ 2-75 Back-up heating driver’s cab (optional) _______________________________________________ 2-76 Back-up heating (optional) ________________________________________________________ 2-77 MAXIMUM MACHINE INCLINATIONS, INFORMATION ___________________________________ 2-78 TRAVELLING, SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ______________________________________________ 2-79 TRAVELLING____________________________________________________________________ 2-80 Superstructure basic position ______________________________________________________ 2-80 Travelling forwards/backwards _____________________________________________________ 2-80 Superstructure holding brake ______________________________________________________ 2-84 Track parking brake _____________________________________________________________ 2-84 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE____________________________________________________ 2-85 Transport - Safety instructions _____________________________________________________ 2-85 WORKING OPERATION - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ____________________________________ 2-86 WORKING OPERATION ___________________________________________________________ 2-88 Before starting work _____________________________________________________________ 2-88 Activating the electronic excavator control ____________________________________________ 2-88 vi

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction Swinging the superstructure _______________________________________________________ 2-89 Braking the superstructure ________________________________________________________ 2-89 Working _______________________________________________________________________ 2-90 Emergency lowering of the equipment _______________________________________________ 2-91 After daily operation _____________________________________________________________ 2-92 ASSEMBLING WORKING EQUIPMENT - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ________________________ 2-93 Securing the machine ____________________________________________________________ 2-94 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR PINS AND BEARINGS (BUSHINGS AND HUBS)____________ 2-95 ON-BOARD CRANE (OPTIONAL)____________________________________________________ 2-96 On-board crane, monitoring, warning and control elements _______________________________ 2-96 On-board crane, putting into operation _______________________________________________ 2-97 On-board crane, drive unit_________________________________________________________ 2-97 On-Board crane, – blocking the boom in position of rest _________________________________ 2-98 On-board crane, checking _________________________________________________________ 2-98 NOTES________________________________________________________________________ 2-100 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING ______________________________________________________ 3-1 INSPECTION AND SERVICING - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS________________________________ 3-3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING WORK, FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD ____________________ 3-7 INSPECTION AND SERVICING PLANS - INSTRUCTIONS _________________________________ 3-9 Plan V ________________________________________________________________________ 3-11 Plan N ________________________________________________________________________ 3-13 Plan T and W___________________________________________________________________ 3-15 Plan A – E _____________________________________________________________________ 3-17 LUBRICATING CHART ____________________________________________________________ 3-24 Lubricating chart – Grease (legend) _________________________________________________ 3-25 Filling quantities - Grease _________________________________________________________ 3-25 INSPECTION PLAN - OIL __________________________________________________________ 3-26 Inspection plan – Oil (legend) ______________________________________________________ 3-27 Filling quantities - oil _____________________________________________________________ 3-28 Filling quantities - other ___________________________________________________________ 3-28 LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES ____________________________________________________ 3-29 Notes on the selection of oils and greases ____________________________________________ 3-29 Avoid mixing of different hydraulic fluids ______________________________________________ 3-29 I. Oils for combustion engines and compressors ______________________________________ 3-30 II. Oils for hydraulic system (selection) ____________________________________________ 3-31 III.a Oils for pump distribution gearboxes __________________________________________ 3-32 III.b Oils for swing gearboxes ___________________________________________________ 3-33 III.c Oils for travel gearboxes ___________________________________________________ 3-34 V. Greases for bearings and swing rings___________________________________________ 3-35 Fluid grease for idlers, track rollers and support rollers __________________________________ 3-36 SERVICING WORK _______________________________________________________________ 3-37 Hose line for oil and cooling liquid changes ___________________________________________ 3-37 ENGINE ________________________________________________________________________ 3-38 Engine - Safety instructions________________________________________________________ 3-38 BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

vii

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Table of contents Engine oil, checking the oil level / topping up __________________________________________ 3-39 Engine oil reservoir, checking the oil level ____________________________________________ 3-40 Changing the engine oil___________________________________________________________ 3-41 Engine oil reservoir, changing the oil ________________________________________________ 3-43 Replacing the oil filters ___________________________________________________________ 3-45 Eliminator filter and centrifuge______________________________________________________ 3-46 Cold-starting fluid (ether) - Replacing the pressure vessel ________________________________ 3-48 COOLING SYSTEM_______________________________________________________________ 3-49 Radiators ______________________________________________________________________ 3-50 Checking cooling-liquid level _______________________________________________________ 3-50 Topping up cooling-liquid _________________________________________________________ 3-51 Cooling liquid change ____________________________________________________________ 3-52 Water filter change ______________________________________________________________ 3-54 AIR-INTAKE SYSTEM _____________________________________________________________ 3-55 Main filter elements ______________________________________________________________ 3-55 Safety filter element______________________________________________________________ 3-58 Air-intake lines__________________________________________________________________ 3-59 Dust collection __________________________________________________________________ 3-59 FUEL SYSTEM __________________________________________________________________ 3-60 Fuel system - Safety instructions ___________________________________________________ 3-60 Replacing the fuel filters __________________________________________________________ 3-60 Fuel filters, draining water _________________________________________________________ 3-62 Fuel tank, replace breather filter ____________________________________________________ 3-63 Cleaning the fuel tanks ___________________________________________________________ 3-63 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ____________________________________________________________ 3-65 Electrical system - Safety instructions________________________________________________ 3-65 Alternator - Instructions ___________________________________________________________ 3-65 Electrical circuit diagrams _________________________________________________________ 3-65 Electrical system switch-cabinets ___________________________________________________ 3-65 Replacing lamps and bulbs ________________________________________________________ 3-65 Xenon floodlight projector, replacing the lamp _________________________________________ 3-66 Lighting systems in LED technonogy, instructions ______________________________________ 3-68 Battery ________________________________________________________________________ 3-69 Charging batteries inside the machine, safety instructions ________________________________ 3-71 Switchgear cabinet ______________________________________________________________ 3-72 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM_____________________________________________________________ 3-74 Hydraulic system - Safety instructions _______________________________________________ 3-74 Depressurizing the hydraulic system_________________________________________________ 3-74 Checking the hydraulic oil level _____________________________________________________ 3-75 Changing the hydraulic oil return-flow (hydraulic oil reservoir) _____________________________ 3-77 Bypass valves (hydraulic oil reservoir) _______________________________________________ 3-79 Replacing the hydraulic oil return-flow filters (filter housing) _______________________________ 3-80 Bypass valves (filter housing - cooling system)_________________________________________ 3-81 Breather filter___________________________________________________________________ 3-82 Filter (control circuit) _____________________________________________________________ 3-83 High-pressure filter for working hydraulics ____________________________________________ 3-84 High-pressure filters for the servo circuit______________________________________________ 3-85 High-pressure filters for pump-flushing circuit __________________________________________ 3-86 High-pressure filters for feeding circuits and swing pumps ________________________________ 3-87 viii

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction High-pressure filters for swing circuit ________________________________________________ 3-88 Changing the hydraulic oil _________________________________________________________ 3-89 Avoid mixing of different hydraulic fluids ______________________________________________ 3-89 Venting the hydraulic system ______________________________________________________ 3-92 Cleaning the hydraulic oil cooler ____________________________________________________ 3-93 Electronic excavator control _______________________________________________________ 3-94 Pressure accumulator - Emergency lowering __________________________________________ 3-95 PUMP TRANSFER GEARBOX ______________________________________________________ 3-96 Checking the gearbox oil level / Topping up with oil _____________________________________ 3-96 Changing the gearbox oil _________________________________________________________ 3-96 Gearbox venting ________________________________________________________________ 3-98 Pre-chambers __________________________________________________________________ 3-98 Pump transfer gearbox lube oil filters ________________________________________________ 3-99 SWING GEARBOX ______________________________________________________________ 3-100 Gearbox - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil __________________________________ 3-100 Changing the gearbox oil ________________________________________________________ 3-101 Gearbox venting _______________________________________________________________ 3-101 TRAVEL GEARBOX _____________________________________________________________ 3-102 Gearbox - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil __________________________________ 3-102 Travel gearbox - Changing the oil __________________________________________________ 3-102 Preliminary gearbox - Draining off oil _______________________________________________ 3-103 CRAWLER TRACKS _____________________________________________________________ 3-104 Track tensioner ________________________________________________________________ 3-105 Pressure-accumulator inspection regulations _________________________________________ 3-107 Checking the gas charging pressure in the pressure accumulator _________________________ 3-107 SWING RING ___________________________________________________________________ 3-108 Swing ring - Instructions _________________________________________________________ 3-108 Bearing races _________________________________________________________________ 3-108 CENTRAL LUBRICATING _________________________________________________________ 3-110 Design _______________________________________________________________________ 3-110 Function _____________________________________________________________________ 3-111 Filling up the grease container ____________________________________________________ 3-112 Breather filter__________________________________________________________________ 3-112 Checking the greasing pressure ___________________________________________________ 3-113 Unblocking a grease line _________________________________________________________ 3-113 Oilfilter for hydraulic circuit grease pump replace ______________________________________ 3-114 Grease filter replace (Filling the grease container) _____________________________________ 3-115 Grease filter replace (Grease lines) ________________________________________________ 3-116 OTHER MAINTENANCE __________________________________________________________ 3-117 Engine _______________________________________________________________________ 3-117 Equipment ____________________________________________________________________ 3-118 LADDERS (OPTIONAL)___________________________________________________________ 3-119 Pressure-accumulator inspection regulations _________________________________________ 3-120 Extract from the German regulations _______________________________________________ 3-120 Checking the gas charging pressure in the pressure accumulator _________________________ 3-120

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

ix

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Table of contents ON-BOARD CRANE, DRIVE UNIT __________________________________________________ 3-121 On-board crane, lubricating_______________________________________________________ 3-122 On-Board crane, checking tightness of fastening bolts __________________________________ 3-122 PUTTING THE HYDRAULIC SHOVEL OUT OF OPERATION AND RECOMMISSIONING_______ 3-123 Putting the hydraulic shovel out of operation _________________________________________ 3-123 Battery storage ________________________________________________________________ 3-123 Recommissioning ______________________________________________________________ 3-123 NOTES________________________________________________________________________ 3-125 4 REPAIR WORK ___________________________________________________________________ 4-1 REPAIR WORK - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS_____________________________________________ 4-3 CONFINED SPACES - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ________________________________________ 4-4 REPAIR WORK, FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD _______________________________________ 4-5 REPAIR WORK, ENGINE ___________________________________________________________ 4-6 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM______________________________________________________________ 4-7 Repair instructions _______________________________________________________________ 4-7 Hydraulic hoses – Instructions ______________________________________________________ 4-7 PRESSURE ACCUMULATORS - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ________________________________ 4-8 WELDING AND FLAME CUTTING WORKS - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ______________________ 4-9 DISPOSAL AT THE END OF THE SERVICE LIFE _______________________________________ 4-12 Dismantling and removal instructions ________________________________________________ 4-12 Risk of deflagrations _____________________________________________________________ 4-12 Risk of fire _____________________________________________________________________ 4-12 Disposing of the machine without polluting the environment ______________________________ 4-12 Further hazardous substances _____________________________________________________ 4-13 Appropriate disposal of batteries____________________________________________________ 4-14 NOTES_________________________________________________________________________ 4-15 5 ANNEX__________________________________________________________________________ 5-1 BOARD-CONTROL-SYSTEM ________________________________________________________ 5-3 BCS III, what’s that? ______________________________________________________________ 5-3 The keys on the front side __________________________________________________________ 5-4 Other elements on the front side _____________________________________________________ 5-4 BCSIII, the start screen ____________________________________________________________ 5-5 Information given on the start screen, top section________________________________________ 5-6 Information given on the start screen, central section_____________________________________ 5-7 Information given on the start screen, lower section ______________________________________ 5-8 Information given on the “Service” screen______________________________________________ 5-9 Engine data screen ______________________________________________________________ 5-10 Hydraulic data screen ____________________________________________________________ 5-11 Lubrication data screen ___________________________________________________________ 5-12 Controls adjustment data screen____________________________________________________ 5-13 View documents screen __________________________________________________________ 5-14 Signal table screen ______________________________________________________________ 5-15 Signal table screen, location _______________________________________________________ 5-16 x

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction Signal table screen, diagram_______________________________________________________ 5-17 Signal table screen, diagram configuration ____________________________________________ 5-18 Code table screen _______________________________________________________________ 5-19 BCS III, interfaces _______________________________________________________________ 5-20 USB interface, data storage _______________________________________________________ 5-20 Saving data to a USB stick ________________________________________________________ 5-21 Saving data to a USB stick, continued _______________________________________________ 5-22 Saving data to a USB stick, continued _______________________________________________ 5-23 BCSIII, cleaning_________________________________________________________________ 5-24 BCSIII, disposal_________________________________________________________________ 5-24 TROUBLESHOOTING _____________________________________________________________ 5-25 Instructions on troubleshooting _____________________________________________________ 5-25 Layout of the fault table ___________________________________________________________ 5-25 Possible causes ________________________________________________________________ 5-25 Measures _____________________________________________________________________ 5-25 Section _______________________________________________________________________ 5-25 FAULT TABLES __________________________________________________________________ 5-26 Combustion engine - Fault table ____________________________________________________ 5-26 Working hydraulics – Fault table ____________________________________________________ 5-27 Track drive – Fault table __________________________________________________________ 5-28 Swing mechnism – Fault table _____________________________________________________ 5-29 Central lubricating system – Fault table ______________________________________________ 5-30 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ____________________________________________________ 5-31 Vibration data __________________________________________________________________ 5-31 ABBREVIATIONS ________________________________________________________________ 5-32 ABBREVIATIONS _______________________________________________________________ 5-33 TECHNICAL DATA _______________________________________________________________ 5-35 NOTES_________________________________________________________________________ 5-37 6 INDEX __________________________________________________________________________ 6-1

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

xi

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Table of contents

xii

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction 1 INTRODUCTION Operating instructions

Target group

Part 1 INTRODUCTION FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 2 OPERATION

Operating personnel The operating personnel must have knowhow relevant to the operation and the application of this or comparable machines.

Part 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING Part 4 REPAIR WORK

Inspection and servicing personnel The inspection and servicing personnel must have know-how relevant to the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

Repair personnel The repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to the repair of this or comparable machines.

Part 5 ANNEX

Part 6 INDEX

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

1-1

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction

1-2

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction PREFACE About this Operating Instructions These operating instructions are designed to familiarize the operator with the machine and its designated use.

The operating instructions contain important information on how to operate the machine safely, properly and with maximum efficiency. Observing these instructions helps to prevent hazardous situations, to reduce repair costs and downtimes and to increase the reliability and service life of the machine.

The operating instructions must be supplemented by the respective national rules and regulations for accident prevention and environmental protection.

The operating instructions must always be available in the driver's cab of the machine.

The operating instructions must be read and put into practice by any person in charge of carrying out work with or on the machine, such as 

operation, including setting-up, troubleshooting in the course of work, care, evacuation of production waste and disposal of fuels and consumables,

All Bucyrus HEX operating manuals are issued in German and then translated. Even a good translation may give rise to questions which Bucyrus HEX will be pleased to answer.

The operating instructions are not work instructions for carrying out major repairs. Such work is willingly done for you by the Bucyrus HEX aftersales service.

Further machine documentation The documentation relating to the machine is listed according to scope, quantity and language in the shipping note of the machine or in the covering letter if supplied separately. The operating instructions, the spare-parts list and the Technical Handbooks are marked with the serial number of the machine.

The documentation supplied with your machine is rather comprehensive. Therefore, it has been split up in several volumes: Volume 1:

the present operating instructions,

Volume 2:

spare-parts list of the machine,



maintenance (inspection, servicing, repair) and / or

Volume 3:

crossreference list of spare-parts,

Volume 4:

electrical circuit diagram and key,



transport.

Volume 5:

documentation of the engine and of other components,

Volume 6:

Technical Handbook Part 1

Volume 7:

Technical Handbook Part 2

In addition to the operating instructions and the mandatory rules and regulations for accident prevention and environmental protection in the user's country and at the place where the machine is to be used, the generally recognized technical rules 1 for safe and proper working must be observed

Depending on the size of your machine, the documentation can also consist of more volumes.

The operating instructions are directed to the mining-machine specialist. They cannot provide basic know-how. This can be acquired, for example, in several days' instruction by a qualified Bucyrus HEX mechanic or by attending an Bucyrus HEX training course for operators or maintenance personnel.

If you cannot find the information you are looking for in the present operating instructions please check also the other volumes of the documentation.

The Bucyrus HEX after-sales service will be pleased to deal with any queries you may have after reading through the operating instructions.

On taking receipt of the consignment, please check that the documentation is complete and in the language requested by you.

The Technical Handbook Part 1 also provides information on how to assemble the machine, on functions of the hydraulic system, on hydraulic circuit diagrams etc.

1

Complies with VDMA recommendation "Operating instructions"

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

1-3

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction WARRANTY The warranty of Bucyrus HEX presupposes among other things that the servicing works as described in the operating instructions have been performed:

Do not operate the machine  when components / assemblies are defective or missing,



by the Bucyrus HEX Service



in a workshop authorized in writing by Bucyrus HEX,

In cases of doubt seek advice from the Bucyrus HEX Service.

by using the original spare parts of Bucyrus HEX.

Bucyrus HEX refuses to assume the guaranteee for damage and consequential damage caused by an abusive utilization of the machine.

or  and 

The proper execution of the servicing works must be documented on the Bucyrus HEX Service checklists.

if one or several of such components of which more than one are installed in the machine have been removed.

Therefore: Do not operate the machine,  when several track rollers or support rollers have been removed; 

when one or several swing gearboxes have failed or been removed;



when one or several teeth on the backhoe or on the shovel are worn or missing;



when parts of the hardfacing layer on the backhoe or on the shovel are worn or missing.

Working under these circumstances results in heavy wear and possibly in severe damage and thus in high repair costs.

Such circumstances are considered by Bucyrus HEX as "abusive utilization".

Why? The machines have been designed and built on the basis of detailed calculations and so that all of the components installed absorb the occurring forces and are thus loaded to an equal extent.

Example: If the machine is used for working with, for instance, one or even several track rollers removed, the forces must be absorbed by the remaining track rollers. These are then overloaded or loaded to a greater extent than calculated.

The consequences are higher wear and consequential damage to the track rollers, but also to other components of the machine: chassis, travel gearbox and crawler track.

1-4

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Complies with VDMA recommendation "Operating Instructions"

Warnings and symbols The following signs are used in the operating instructions to designate instructions of particular importance: Precautionary rules and measures designed to protect the machine operator and other persons from lifethreatening danger or injuries and to prevent extensive damage.

Information and precautionary measures designed to prevent damage to the machine or other property.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

1-5

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction DESIGNATED USE, UNAUTHORIZED USE The machine has been built in accordance with state-of-art standards and the recognized safety rules. Nevertheless, its use may constitute a risk to life and limb for the user or third parties or cause damage to the machine and to other material property (acceptable risk) An acceptable risk is present, e.g.: loose material or material to be loaded may drop out of the bucket or backhoe while the working equipment is being swivelled.

The machine must be used only in technically perfect condition in accordance with its designated use and the instructions set out in the operating instructions, and only by safety-conscious persons who are fully aware of the risks involved in operating the machine. Any functional disorders, especially those affecting the safety of the machine, should therefore be rectified immediately.

With attached shovel equipment, the machine is to be used solely for loosening and loading of:  sand, oil sand,  gravel,

Using the hydraulic shovel or its attachments for purposes other than or extending beyond those stated above, e.g.:  for lifting or transporting persons, 

as a working platform,



for lifting crane loads without the equipment being approved for this purpose,



for driving in posts, sheetpiles supports, etc. without the equipment being approved for this purpose,



for moving material to the side (sweeping),



for breaking down rocks by beating with the shovel or the backhoe,



for fitting or reparing of other machínes

is contrary to its designated use and considered as "unauthorized use".

 blasted rock,  ore,  coal, and other raw materials.

With attached backhoe equipment, the machine can additionally also be used for excavating and loading of excavatable soils and other raw materials.

Operating the machine within the limits of the desigated use also involves observing the instructions set out in the operating instructions and complying with the inspection and maintenance directives.

1-6

Lifting eyes on the lower carriage -

are settled for transporting with a crane only.

-

must not be used for towing a machine.

Improper use may involve a life-threatening risk for operators or other personnel or may cause injury or extensive damage.

The manufacturer/supplier cannot be held liable for any damage resulting from other than the designated use. The risk involved in such misuse lies with the user.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction Noise emission information

Vibration information

Noise emission data are specified in acc. with ISO 6394.

On the condition that the hydraulic shovel is used within the limits of its designated use, the installation of seats for drivers in conformity with ISO 7096 ensures that the weighted vibration accelerations awz (measured in compliance with ISO 2631 Part I) fulfil the requirements with respect to the protection against whole-body vibrations in acc. with EC Vibration Directive 2002/44/EG.

Time-averaged A-weighted emission sound pressure level at operator’s position with the machine running at high idle: LAeq = XX dB.

The vibrations transferred are indicated in acc. with EC Machine Directive 2006/42/EG, Annex I; Section 3.6.3.1, resp. with the "Regulations for noise and vibration at the place of work", Section 4, as of 18.12.2008.

The effective value of the weighted acceleration to which the wole body is exposed, does not exceed 0.5 m/s2.

The measurement uncertainty is ±3% (tolerance of the measuring instruments).

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

1-7

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction ORGANIZATIONAL MEASURES The operating instructions must always be at hand at the place of use of the machine, e.g. by stowing them in the place provided for such purpose.

In addition to the operating instructions, observe and instruct the user in all other generally applicable legal and other mandatory regulations relevant to accident prevention and environmental protection.

Personal protective equipment and the working clothing Depending on the cleaning, servicing and/or repair activities to be performed, the personal protective equipment and the working clothing may consist of the following items: 

fall arresters



protective suit



helmet



goggles - e. g. for cleaning work - or for welding work



protective gloves - e.g. for work on hot units - for grinding and welding work

Personnel entrusted with work on the machine must have read the operating instructions and in particular the chapter on safety before beginning work. Reading the operating instructions after work has begun is too late. This applies especially to persons working only occasionally on the machine, e.g. during setting up or maintenance.



protective working gloves - e.g. for fitting work - for grinding and welding work



ear protectors

Check - at least from time to time - whether the personnel is carrying out the work in compliance with the operating instructions and paying attention to risks and safety factors.

See to it that safety instructions and warnings attached to the machine are always complete and perfectly legible.

These compulsory regulations may also deal with the handling of hazardous substances, issuing and/or wearing of personal protective equipment or traffic regulations.

The operating instructions must be supplemented by instructions covering the duties involved in supervising and notifying special organizational features, such as job organization, working sequences or the personnel entrusted with the work.

For reasons of security, long hair must be tied back or otherwise secured, garments must be close-fitting and no jewellery, such as rings, may be worn. Injury may result from being caught up in the machinery or from rings catching on moving parts.

Use protective equipment wherever required by the circumstances or by law.

Observe all safety instructions and warnings attached to the machine.

In the event of safety-relevant modifications or changes in the behaviour of the machine during operation, stop the machine immediately and report the malfunction to the competent authority/person.

Never make any modifications, additions or conversions which might affect safety without the supplier's approval. This also applies to the installation and adjustment of safety devices and valves as well as to welding work on load-bearing elements.

Use only the original sparts parts of Bucyrus HEX. They are the only ones to fulfill the technical specifications of the machine.

Replace hydraulic hoses within stipulated and appropriate intervals, even if no safety-relevant defects have been detected.

Adhere to prescribed intervals or those specified in the operating instructions for routine checks and inspections.

For the execution of maintenance work, tools and workshop equipment adapted to the task on hand are absolutely indispensable.

The personnel must be familiar with the location and operation of fire extinguishers.

Observe all fire-warning and fire-fighting procedures.

1-8

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction Selection and qualification of personnel; basic responsibilities

In the event of malfunction, stop the machine immediately and lock it. Have any defects rectified immediately.

Any work on and with the machine must be executed by reliable personnel only. Statutory minimum age limits must be observed.

Start the machine from the driver's seat only.

Employ only trained or instructed staff and set out clearly the individual responsibilities of the personnel for operation, set-up, maintenance and repair.

Make sure that only authorized personnel works on or with the machine.

Define the machine operator's responsibilities giving the operator the authority to refuse instructions by third parties that are contrary to safety.

Do not allow persons to be trained or instructed or persons taking part in a general training course to work on or with the machine without being permanently supervised by an experienced person.

Work on the electrical system and equipment of the machine must be carried out only by a skilled electrician or by instructed persons under the supervision and guidance of a skilled electrician and in accordance with electrical engineering rules and regulations.

Work on chassis and brake systems must be performed by skilled personnel only, which has been specially trained for such work.

Work on hydraulic systems must be carried out only by personnel with special knowledge and experience of hydraulic equipment.

Safety instructions governing specific operational phases Standard operation

During start-up and shut-down procedures always watch the indicators in accordance with the operating instructions.

Before setting the machine in motion, make sure that nobody is at risk.

Before starting work or travelling with the machine, check that braking, signalling and lighting systems are fully functional.

Before setting the machine in motion always check that the accessories have been safely stowed away.

In conditions of poor visibility and after dark always switch on the lighting system.

Persons accopanying the driver must be seated on the passenger seat provided for this purpose.

When crossing underpasses and bridges or when passing under overhead lines always make sure that there is sufficient clearance.

Always keep a distance from the working face and from slopes.

Avoid any operation that might be a risk to machine stability.

Never travel across slopes; always keep the working equipment and the load close to the ground, especially when travelling downhill.

On sloping terrain always adapt your travelling speed to the prevailing ground conditions.

Before leaving the driver's seat always secure the machine against inadvertent movement and unauthorized use. Shut off the engines.

Avoid any operational mode that might be prejudicial to safety.

Before beginning work, familiarize yourself with the surroundings and circumstances of the site, such as obstacles in the working area and the bearing capacity of the soil.

Take the necessary precautions to ensure that the machine is in a safe and reliable state.

Operate the machine only if all protective and safety-oriented devices, such as removable safety devices, emergency shut-off equipment, soundproofing elements and exhausters, are in place and fully functional.

Check the machine at least once per working shift for obvious damage and defects. Report any changes (incl. changes in the machine's working behaviour) to the competent organization/person immediately. If necessary, stop the machine immediately and lock it.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

1-9

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction Special work in conjunction with utilization of the machine and maintenance and repairs as well as troubleshooting during work; disposal of parts and consumables Observe the adjusting, maintenance and inspection activities and intervals set out in the operating instructions, including information on the replacement of parts and equipment. These activities may be executed by skilled personnel only.

Brief operating personnel before beginning special operations and maintenance work, and appoint a person to supervise the activities.

In any work concerning the operation, conversion or adjustment of the machine and its safetyoriented devices or any work related to maintenance, inspection and repair, always observe the start-up and shut-down procedures set out in the operating instructions and the information on maintenance work.

Ensure that the maintenance area is adequately secured.

If the machine is completely shut down for maintenance and repair work, it must be secured against inadvertent starting by:  removing the ignition key and  attaching a warning sign.

Carry out maintenance and repair work only if the machine is positioned on stable and level ground and has been secured against inadvertent movements.

To avoid the risk of accidents, individual parts and large assemblies being moved for replacement purposes should be carefully attached to lifting tackle and secured. Use only suitable and technically perfect lifting gear and suspension systems with adequate lifting capacity. Never work or stand under suspended loads.

Clean the machine, especially connections and threaded unions, of any traces of oil, fuel or preservatives before carrying out maintenance/repair.

Never use aggressive detergents. Use lint-free cleaning rags.

Before cleaning the machine with water, steam jet (high-pressure cleaning) or detergents, cover or tape up all openings which - for safety and functional reasons - must be protected against water, steam or detergent penetration. Special care must be taken with electric motors and switch-gear cabinets.

Ensure during cleaning of the machine that the temperature sensors of the fire-warning and firefighting systems do not come into contact with hot cleaning agents as this might activate the firefighting system.

Exhaust pipes and turbo chargers in the engine compartments are covered with special heatinsulating material. This material must not be spray-washed with steam-jet cleaners or highpressure cleaners. It will be damaged. Therefore cover all the insulating material with plastic foils before using steam-jet cleaners or high-pressure cleaners inside the engine compartments.

After cleaning remove all covers and tapes applied for that purpose.

After cleaning, examine all fuel, lubricant, brake and hydraulic fluid lines for leaks, loose connections, chafe marks and damage. Any defect found must be rectified without delay.

Always tighten any screwed connections that have been loosened during maintenance and repair.

Any safety devices removed for set-up, maintenance or repair purposes must be refitted and checked immediately upon completion of maintenance and repair work.

Ensure that all consumables and replaced parts are disposed of safely and with minimum environmental impact.

The fastening of loads and the instructing of crane operators should be entrusted to experienced persons only. The marshaller giving the instructions must be within sight or sound of the operator.

For carrying out overhead assembly work always use specially designed or otherwise safetyoriented ladders and working platforms. Never use machine parts as a climbing aid Wear a safety harness when carrying out maintenance work at heights above 1 m.

Wear an approved harness equipped with fall arresters and safety lines.

Keep all handles, steps, handrails, platforms, landings and ladders free from dirt, snow and ice.

1-10

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction Warning of special dangers

Gas, dust, steam and smoke

Electric energy

Always start and operate the engine in a wellvented area;

Use only original fuses with the specified current rating. Switch off the machine immediately if trouble occurs in the electrical system.

When working with the machine, maintain a safe distance from overhead electric lines. If work is to be carried out close to overhead lines, the working equipment must be kept well away from them.

Caution, danger! Check out the prescribed safety distances.

If your machine comes into contact with a live wire  do not leave the machine  drive the machine out of the hazard zone; warn others against approaching and touching the machine  have the live wire de-energized  do not leave the machine until the damaged or contacted line has been safely de-energized.

The electrical equipment of machines is to be inspected and checked at regular intervals. Defects such as loose connections or scorched cables must be rectified immediately.

High-voltage system Floodlamps equipped with gaz discharge lamps (Xenon) require a high-voltage supply (ca. 25 kV).

If in an enclosed area, vent the exhaust to the outside; Do not modify or tamper with the exhaust system Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm Operate fuel-operated heating systems only on adequately ventilated premises. Before starting the machine on enclosed premises, make sure that there is sufficient ventilation.

Observe the regulations in force at the respective site.

Carry out welding, flame-cutting and grinding work on the machine only if this has been expressly authorized, as there may be a risk of explosion and fire.

Before carrying out welding, flame-cutting and grinding operations, clean the machine and its surroundings from dust and other inflammable substances and make sure that the premises are adequately ventilated (risk of explosion).

CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning Diesel fuel and Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm.

The high voltage is generated by a ballast unit.

Switch off the electrical system of the hydraulic shovel before touching the lamp or the ballast unit.

Battery Warning! Battery Posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

1-11

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction Hydraulic equipment

Ether

Check all lines, hoses and screwed connections regularly for leaks and obvious damage. Repair damage immediately. Splashed oil may cause injury and fire.

The machine can be equipped with pressure vessels for cold-starting fluid (ether) installed in the engine compartment. Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage. Protect the vessels against damage and high temperatures.

Depressurize all system sections and pressure pipes (hydraulic system) to be removed in accordance with the specific instructions for the unit concerned before carrying out any repair work.

Hydraulic lines must be laid and fitted properly.

Ensure that no connections are interchanged. The fittings, lengths and quality of the hoses must comply with the technical requirements.

Noise During operation, all sound baffles of the machine must be closed.

Always wear the prescribed ear protectors.

Oil, grease and other chemical substances When handling oil, grease or other chemical substances, observe the product-related safety regulations (see safety specifications).

Be careful when handling hot consumables (risk of burning or scalding).

Do not store pressure vessels with cold-starting fluid (ether) on the hydraulic shovel.

Do not eat, drink or smoke when replacing pressure vessels with cold-starting fluid (ether). Observe the instructions on the pressure vessels.

Provide for sufficient ventilation (see also Part 3 "Inspection and servicing").

Do not open empty cold-starting fluid pressure vessels (ether). Have the vessels disposed of properly.

For further details please refer to the instructions and safety data-sheets of the manufacturer / supplier of pressure vessels with cold starting fluid (ether).

Transporting and recommissioning The machine must be loaded and transported only in accordance with the operating instructions.

Use only appropriate means of transport and lifting gear of adequate capacity.

The recommisioning procedure must be strictly in accordance with the operating instructions.

1-12

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD Safety instructions

Place suitable fire guardings (fire barriers) if open fire or flying sparks cannot be avoided during repair work.

Prior to commencing work, obtain informationon the national and corporate rules for the prevention of accidents and avoiding fires.

Apply special protection to cables, cable ducts as well as to hose and pipe lines.

Pay particular attention to hazards caused by combustible and easily flammable substances.

The engine compartment can be equipped with pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether). Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

Protect the pressure vessels against damage before beginning to work in or close to the engine compartment.

Obtain information on the safe handling of the fire extinguishers to be used.

Avoid smoking and open fire on, next to and below the hydraulic shovel.

Combustible and easily flammable substances or liquids increase the fire and explosion hazard.

Do not store or transport flammable substances on the hydraulic shovel during the work. This is also valid for pressure vessels containing flammable substances as, for instance, spray oil or coldstarting fluid (ether). They are heat-sensitive and can explode even if exposed only to intensive sunlight.

Clean the hydraulic shovel carefully, if oil, grease, fuel, detergents or cold-starting fluid have been spilt over the machine. If possible, use a steam-jet cleaner for cleaning.

These substance can also ignite themselves if they come close to hot units or objects as, for instance, a turbocharger.

Even battery gases can ignite in open flames or fire.

If necessary, also cover the ground with fireprotective blankets.

Ensure sufficient ventilation.

Clean the hydraulic shovel before starting a job.

Do not keep any fire extinguishers that are not suitable or have not been tested.

Do not extinguish flammable liquids with water.

Use: 

dry-powder,



carbon-dioxide or



foam extinguishing compounds.

When getting into contact with burning substances, the fire-fighting water would abruptly evaporate and distribute the substance such as oil over a wide area. Water causes short-circuits in the electrical system thus possibly entailing new hazards.

Call the fire brigade.

Have all your welding, flame cutting and grinding work approved.

Avoid parking the hydraulic shovel in places where 

combustible substances such as coal dust or tar are present.



open or smouldering fire may occur.

Remove the hydraulic shovel from such an area where combustible or easily flammable liquids have spilled from the hydraulic shovel onto the ground.

Flying sparks (caused by welding, flame cutting, grinding, electrical short-circuit) may cause fire on the ground that can spread to the hydraulic shovel.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

1-13

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction

1-14

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction NOTES ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

1-15

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Introduction

1-16

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation 2 OPERATION Operating instructions

Target group

Part 1 INTRODUCTION FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 2 OPERATION

Operating personnel The operating personnel must have knowhow relevant to the operation and the application of this or comparable machines.

Part 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING Part 4 REPAIR WORK

Inspection and servicing personnel The inspection and servicing personnel must have know-how relevant to the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

Repair personnel The repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to the repair of this or comparable machines.

Part 5 ANNEX

Part 6 INDEX

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

2-1

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

2-2

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation OPERATION - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Operating instructions Never operate the machine before having read and understood the operating instructions.

Safety belt For machines with a safety belt for operating personnel: Check the safety belt attached to the driver's seat and to the trainer’s seat. In the event of damage or after an accident, have it replaced immediately.

Apply the safety belt before starting work.

Pay special attention to: the "Fundamental Safety Instructions" and to all warning and instruction signs attached to the machine.

Familiarize yourself with the layout, the functioning and the sense of actuation of the control elements prior to starting up the machine.

Activate the control elements from the driver's seat only.

Keep the operating instructions with the machine at all times.

Operating personnel The operating personnel must be fully informed of the operation and application of this or comparable machines.

The necessary know-how can be acquired in several days' instruction, e.g. by an Bucyrus HEX mechanic or by attending an Bucyrus HEX operator's training course.

Personal protective gear and working clothing Wear a safety helmet and working footwear with non-slip soles. Smooth soles may slip from steps and pedals resulting in injury or incorrect operation.

Wear closely fitting working clothing when operating the machine. Loose, wide garments may result in control levers being inadvertently activated

State of the machine Operate the machine only in a safe state and only in accordance with its designated use. Always observe the safety instructions.

Always have inspection and maintenance work carried out on schedule.

Operate the machine only with the equipment and component combinations approved by Bucyrus HEX. Clear-cut data are given in the technical specification.

Never install and commission other equipment and component combinations without Bucyrus HEX having first inspected and approved the project.

Before starting work or travelling with the machine, check that the braking, signalling and lighting systems are fully functional.

Poor visibility may result in accidents. Always clean the windows and the glass covers of all lamps before starting the machine.

Check that all warning and instruction signs attached to the machine are present and legible.

Entering and leaving the machine Always face the machine when entering or leaving it.

Use only the ladders, steps, platforms and grab handles provided when entering and leaving the machine.

Always keep ladders, steps and platforms in a non-slip, safe state and remove any oil, grease, soil, snow, ice and other foreign matter immediately.

Hazard range The hazard range is that zone around the machine in which persons are within reach of loads or attachments falling as a result of operational movements by the machine, of its equipment and attachments or of swinging loads.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-3

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Persons within the hazard zone Always use the horn to warn persons in the immediate vicinity of the machine before starting up the machine.

Ensure that no one sets foot in the hazard zone of the machine. Interrupt work until such persons have left the hazard zone.

Operating Instructions, where to store it in the driver’s cab One copy of the Operating Instructions for the machine must be available in the driver’s cab during operation.

The binder with the Operators Instructions can be stored in the tray (Fig. 2-1:).

Marshallers The marshaller must keep outside the hazard zone.

Have a marshaller to assist you: 

when you have no clear overview over the hazard zone of the machine,



when reversing,



when shunting.

Use only those communication signals which you and the marshaller understand, or use aids for communication (e.g. walkie-talkie/camera).

Calls cannot be understood by the marshaller because of the noise made by the machine during operation.

Fig. 2-1:

Keep in constant contact with the marshaller.

Stop the machine immediately if you lose contact with the marshaller.

Securing the machine Secure the machine as described under "Securing the machine" before: 

mounting or dismantling the attachment,



parking the machine after daily operation,



carrying out any servicing or repair work.

2-4

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD Safety instructions Prior to commencing work, obtain informationon the national and corporate rules for the prevention of accidents and avoiding fires.

Pay particular attention to hazards caused by combustible and easily flammable substances.

Obtain information on the safe handling of the fire extinguishers to be used.

Remove the hydraulic shovel from such an area where combustible or easily flammable liquids have spilled from the hydraulic shovel onto the ground.

Flying sparks (caused by welding, flame cutting, grinding, electrical short-circuit) may cause fire on the ground that can spread to the hydraulic shovel.

Clean the hydraulic shovel before starting work.

Place suitable fire guardings (fire barriers) if open fire or flying sparks cannot be avoided during repair work.

If necessary, also cover the ground with fireprotective blankets.

Avoid smoking and open fire on, next to and below the hydraulic shovel.

Apply special protection to cables, cable ducts as well as to hose and pipe lines.

Combustible and easily or highly inflammable substances or liquids increase the risk of fire and explosion

The engine compartment can be equipped with pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether). Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

Protect the pressure vessels against damage before beginning to work in or close to the engine compartment.

Do not store or transport flammable substances on the hydraulic shovel during the work. This is also valid for pressure vessels containing flammable substances as, for instance, spray oil or coldstarting fluid (ether). They are heat-sensitive and can explode even if exposed only to intensive sunlight.

Clean the hydraulic shovel carefully, if oil, grease, fuel, detergents or cold-starting fluid have been spilt over the machine. If possible, use a steam-jet cleaner for cleaning.

These substance can also ignite themselves if they come close to hot units or objects as, for instance, a turbocharger.

Clean rubber or electrical with compressed air only.

Ensure sufficient ventilation.

Even battery gases can ignite in open flames or fire.

Avoid parking the hydraulic shovel in places where 

combustible substances such as coal dust or tar are present.



open or smouldering fire may occur.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Ensure sufficient ventilation.

Do not keep any fire extinguishers that are not suitable or have not been tested.

Do not extinguish flammable liquids with water.

Use: 

dry-powder, carbon-dioxide or foam extinguishing compounds.

When getting into contact with burning substances, the fire-fighting water would abruptly evaporate and distribute the substance such as oil over a wide area. Water causes short-circuits in the electrical system thus possibly entailing new hazards.

Call the fire brigade.

Have all your welding, flame cutting and grinding work approved before starting work.

2-5

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation DESCRIPTION OF THE HYDRAULIC SHOVEL

Fig. 2-2:

2-6

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Hydraulic shovel layout Fig. 2-2:

33 – Driver's cab

Undercarriage

34 – Control stand with BCS

1 - Track drive 2 – Idler 3 - Track roller 4 - Support roller 5 - Crawler track 6 - Track tensioner 7 - Swing ring 8 – Emergency ladder

36 – Control-cabinet with CMS 38 – Control-cabinet (preheating system) 39 – Control-cabinet with battery main switch 40 – Batteries 41 – Air conditioner 42 – Service-station (tank lift) 43 – Alternator with drive (optional) 44 – On-board crane 45 – Hydraulic system (on-board crane)

Superstructure 11 – Engine

46 – Grease container of central lubricating system

12 – Radiator (engine cooling liquid)

47 – Tool cabinet (optional)

13 – Reservoir (engine cooling liquid)

51 – Hydraulic ladder

14 – Air-intake system

52 – Ladder

15 – Exhaust system

53 – Counterweight

16 – Fuel Tank

54 – Emergency ladder

17 – Cooler (fuel) 18 – Engine oil reservoir (optional)

Loading bucket

17 – Hydraulic oil reservoir

61 – Boom

18 – Engine oil reservoir

62 – TriPower linkage

19 – Hydraulic oil reservoir

63 – Stick

20 – Hydraulic oil cooler

64 – Bottom-dump bucket

21 – Filter housing (cooling system)

65 – Boom cylinder

22 – Pump transfer gearbox

66 – Stick cylinder

23 – Working pump

67 – Tipping cylinder

24 – Swing pump

68 – Bottom-dump cylinder

25 – Servo system pump

69 – Control valves

26 – Gearbox circulating pump

70 – Quick-action valve

27 – Filling pump (swing circuit) 28 - Fan drive pump (engine radiator) 29 - Fan drive pump (hydraulic oil cooler) 30 – Cooling oil pump 31 – Swing gear 32 – Travel block and rotor

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-7

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Undercarriage The undercarriage of the hydraulic hydraulic shovel serves as a stable base and for travelling.

The crawler tracks are driven hydraulically with oil motors and travel gearboxes. Undercarriage and superstructure are connected by means of a swing ring.

Superstructure The superstructure accommodates the drive and part of the hydraulic and electrical equipment.

Drive The drive unit comprises diesel engines, pump transfer gearboxes, hydraulic pumps, hydraulic cylinders and hydraulic motors.

Hydraulic system All working and travelling movements are performed hydraulically. The movements are controlled by servovalves. The working commands are initiated by hand and transmitted to the valves via control circuits. The oil supply from the superstructure to the undercarriage is ensured by the rotor. The hydraulic system is overload-protected by pressure-relief valves. The hydraulic pumps are supplied with oil from a hydraulic reservoir.

2-8

Control and Monitoring Platform (CAMP) The electronic CAMP system ensures the control and monitoring of all electrical and hydraulical functions of the hydraulic shovel.

Four interconnected electronic units ensure optimal use of the installed engine power. Microprocessors are used to adapt the power output of the hydraulic pumps optimally to actual operating conditions. The machine is thus prevented from demanding more hydraulic power than the diesel engines can provide.

The desired working movements are detected by microcontrollers which permanently sense the position of hand levers and pedals.

As soon as movement is detected, the corresponding signals are transmitted to the electronic units. These units activate the drive control in order to provide the hydraulic energy needed for working. Only then do they activate the electrohydraulic valves which control the execution of the working movements.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Board-Control-System (BCS) The BCS is a micro-processor-controlled system for the acquisition and processing of measuring data.

It's function consists in collecting data of the hydraulic shovel operating conditions and to evaluate, store and display these data to the hydraulic shovel driver. For this purpose, the BCS is connected via a bus system to the Control and Monitoring Platform (CAMP). An interface with the outside world ensures the transfer of stored data and software updating.

The measured values (actual values) from the sensors and transducers installed in the hydraulic shovel are compared to the predefined reference values. Inadmissible deviations are indicated as fault messages on a display screen. Sensor or transducer defects or defective connecting cables are detected and indicated by plain-text messages.

The data from the engine electronics are acquired, processed and displayed in the same way.

Critical states of operation are brought to the driver's attention by means of optical and acoustic warning signals.

The display screen of the BCS is a touch-screen with a surface sensitive to the touch. This feature supports the hydraulic shovel driver or the service technician in navigating through the menus of the BCS sorftware.

For further information in this respect, please refer to section 5 in this Operating Instructions or to the brochure "Board-Control-System – Operating instructions"

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Demand control / Zero-flow regulation In the fine-control range, swivelling of the hydraulic pumps, and thus the variation of oil flow, are proportional to control lever and pedal valve travel. This means that during the work, the pumps supply only as much hydraulic oil as required to perform the working movement. In the neutral position of the control levers, the pumps are automatically swivelled to zeroflow.

These special features offer the following advantages: 

reduced fuel consumption



minimum power losses



reduced temperature of the hydraulic oil



greater service life of hydraulic pumps and diesel engines.

Automatic reset to idling If no servovalves are actuated by the control pedals or levers for more than 8 seconds (factory-set value, adjustable), the engine is automatically set back to idling speed (factory setting ca. 1000 rpm, adjustable). This feature, too, contributes to reducing the fuel consumption.

Electrical system The electrical system operates on 24 volts.

2-9

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Signs Warning and instruction signs Observe the warning and instruction signs attached to the machine.

Keep all the signs legible and clean.

Replace signs immediately if they have become illegible.

New warning and instruction signs can be ordered from the Bucyrus HEX Spare Parts Service. The ordering part numbers are set out in the spare-parts list of the machine.

Fig. 2-3: - Fig. 2-8: show the location of warning and instruction signs on the machine.

2-10

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-3:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-11

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-4:

2-12

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-5:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-13

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-6:

2-14

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-7:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-15

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-8:

2-16

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Machine number The identification plate with the machine number (Fig. 2-10:) is attached to the front side of the Aframe (arrow, Fig. 2-9:).

Fig. 2-10:

Fig. 2-9:

Engine number The serial number plate (arrow, Fig. 2-11:) for the diesel engines are located on the diesel engines.

Fig. 2-11:

Component numbers Other larger units also have identification plates indicating, among other things, their serial number.

On steel components, the Bucyrus HEX part number or the serial number may be stamped into the metal at a clearly visible place.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-17

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Entering and leaving the machine, Safety instructions Clean off oil, grease, soil, mud, snow, ice and other substances from footwear, grab handles, ladders and steps.

Keep ladders, steps, platforms and grab handles in a non-slippery condition.

Access ladder lighting The access ladder of the machine can be illuminated.

From outside: The pull-switch (2, Fig. 2-13:) of the lighting system is located beneath the superstructure. The lights are switched on from the ground by means of the pull-rope.

Risk of injury due to slipping.

From the cab: The switch is located besides the door (arrow, Fig. 2-14:).

For entering and leaving use only the ladders, steps, platforms and grab handles provided (see: illustration in Fig. 2-12:).

The lighting remains on during a presettable ON time. The ON time of the lighting is factory-adjusted to three minutes.

Always face the machine when entering or leaving it.

Fig. 2-13:

Fig. 2-12:

Fig. 2-14:

2-18

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Swinging ladder

Lowering the swinging ladder (from the upper carriage)

Raising resp. lowering the swinging ladder (Fig. 2-15:).

 Start engine.  Push lever (1, Fig. 2-16:) on control valve (2) downwards to position “ II “.

The swinging ladder is lowered (Fig. 2-15:).

The swinging ladder can also be lowered when the engine ist stopped.

Fig. 2-15:

Raising the swinging ladder (from the upper carriage)  Start engine.  Pull lever (1, Fig. 2-16:) on control valve (2) upwards to position “ I “.

The swinging ladder is raised (Fig. 2-17:).

Fig. 2-17:

Lowering the swinging ladder (from the bottom)  Pull down rope (3, Fig. 2-18:).

The swinging ladder is lowered (Fig. 2-15:).

Fig. 2-16:

The upper carriage can only be swung when the folding ladder is raised completely (Fig. 2-17:).

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Fig. 2-18:

2-19

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Folding ladder (optional) Raising resp. lowering the folding ladder (Fig. 2-19:).

Lowering the folding ladder (from the upper carriage)  Start engine.  Push lever (1, Fig. 2-20:) on control valve (2) downwards to position “ II “.

The folding ladder is lowered (Fig. 2-19:).

The folding ladder can also be lowered when the engine is stopped.

Fig. 2-19:

Raising the folding ladder (from the upper carriage)  Start engine.  Pull lever (1, Fig. 2-20:) on control valve (2) upwards to position “ I “.

The folding ladder is raised (Fig. 2-16:).

Fig. 2-21:

Lowering the folding ladder (from the bottom)  Pull down rope (3, Fig. 2-22:).

The folding ladder is lowered (Fig. 2-19:).

Fig. 2-20:

The upper carriage can only be swung when the folding ladder is raised completely (Fig. 2-16:).

2-20

Fig. 2-22:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Emergency exit in driver’s cab and escape ladder The sliding window (arrow, Fig. 2-23:) on the lefthand side of the driver’s cab serves as an alternative opening / emergency exit.

To open the sliding window from inside the cab:  Lift latch (1).  Grasp handle (2) and slide window pane to the left.

The escape ladder (arrow, Fig. 2-24:) is located beside the driver´s cab.

Function of ladder locking as well as free movement of the ladder must be regularly checked accordiing to the maintenance plans.

Before unlocking the ladder: Be sure that no person is near to the position the ladder moves to.

Fig. 2-24:

 Kick down locking lever (2, Fig. 2-25:). The escape ladder is now unlocked and moves down quickly to the ground.  Swing barrier (1, Fig. 2-25:) to the right and use the ladder to escape downwards.

Fig. 2-25:

Fig. 2-23:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-21

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Switching the cab interior lighting on and off The cab interior lighting can be switched on and off with the switches (arrow, Fig. 2-26:), (96, Fig. 2-27:) and (arrow, Fig. 2-28:) The cab interior light is supplied with power even when the electrical system is shut down.

When leaving the machine, the interior light must therefore be switched off. The batteries could be discharged if the interior light is allowed to remain on for a prolonged period.

Fig. 2-26:

Fig. 2-27:

Fig. 2-28:

2-22

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Switching the maintenance lights on and off The maintenance lights in the various modules can be activated from a central point with the switches (arrow, Fig. 2-29:) or (95, Fig. 2-30:).

The invidual modules are also equipped with switches, for example the engine module: Switch at the switchgear cabinet behind the hydraulic oil reservoir (1, Fig. 2-31:).

Fig. 2-29:

Fig. 2-30:

Fig. 2-31:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-23

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Emergency shut-off function The emergency shut-off function can be triggered from five different places on the machine:  by pressing the switch (red) on the front panel of the control column (35, Fig. 2-32:),  by pressing the switch (red) on the drive regulators on the right-hand and on the left-hand side (Fig. 2-33:),  by pressing the switch (red) on the control cabinet in the engine module (Fig. 2-34:),  by pulling the pull-switch below the counterweight on the left (5, Fig. 2-35:).

The emergency shut-off function disconnects all power outputs of the electronic control units. In this case, all engines are shut off and all valves are deenergized so that no working movements can be performed anymore.

Fig. 2-33:

The power supply of the electronic control units of the engines (ECM) and of the machine (BCS, PLC) is, however, not interrupted. For this reason, the monitoring functions continue to remain active.

Other auxiliary functions such as:  the fire extinguishing system,  the service station (tank-lift) and,  the radio, the cab interior lighting and the access ladder lighting remain functional as well.

Fig. 2-34:

The emergency shut-off function can also be triggered before maintenance operations are performed on the machine. For this purpose, one of the switches is depressed and secured with a padlock. Any inadvertent starting of the engine is thus prevented.

Fig. 2-35:

Putting the machine back into operation The machine can only be put back into operation when all switches listed above are again in their basic position (i.e. not actuated).

Fig. 2-32:

2-24

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Shutting off the supply voltage (battery main switch) The supply voltage is shut off when either of the following switches (black / yellow) is depressed:  the switch on the control column (31, Fig. 13),  the switch in the engine module (Fig. 14).

This function shuts off the complete electrical system of the by disconnecting the two poles from the batteries (battery main switch).

In this case, all engines are shut off and all valves are de-energized so that no working movements can be performed anymore.

The power supply of the electronic control units of the engines (ECM) and of the machine (BCS, SPS) is shut off after a brief delay. The delay ensures that the current operating data can be saved and the systems shut down properly.

Fig. 2-36:

The machine can only be put back into operation when all switches listed above are again in their basic position (i.e. not actuated).

Fig. 2-37:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-25

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Driver’s seat The driver’s seat (Fig. 2-38: and Fig. 2-39:) can be adjusted in several positions.

Never adjust the seat while driving. Concentrate on the road to avoid accidents.

Before carrying out any seat adjustments stop the machine and set the control levers to "0"

Fig. 2-38:

2-26

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-39:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-27

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Reducing operators exposure to vibrations Vibrations, oscillations and movements of the machine cannot be avoided when the machine is in operation. They also have an effect on the operator.

Windscreen washer The fluid reservoir (1, Fig. 2-41:) of the windscreen washer is located in the cab module. The capacity of the reservoir is indicated under "Refilling quantities - Other".

These effects on the operator can however be avoided, if the driver's seat is adjusted correctly.

Therefore, make use of the seat's various adjustment features (see Fig. 2-38: and Fig. 2-39:): 

shock absorption (Absorber),



body weight setting (Weight adjustment),



horizontal movement damping (Fore/aft isolator).

Adjust the seat before beginning work to suit your personal requirements. Check whether all adjustments are functional. If this is not possible, have the seat checked and repaired as soon as possible.

Fig. 2-41:

Trainer's / instructor's seat For driver training / instructing purposes it is often required that a trainer / instructor accompanies the driver in the cab.

For the safety of the trainer / instructor during hydraulic shovel operation the cab is equipped with a second seat. This seat is installed behind the driver's seat (Fig. 2-40:).  Sit down on this seat and do not forget to fasten the seat-belt (if installed).  Do not leave this seat during the training / instruction session and /or as long as the machine is in operation.

Fig. 2-40:

2-28

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Fire extinguisher

Handling

The hydraulic shovel is equipped with two fire extinguishers (arrow Fig. 2-42:).

Fig. 2-43:

Fig. 2-42:

 Pull out securing pin (2, Fig. 2-43:).

The hydraulic shovel driver and the maintenance personnel must inform themselves about how to handle the fire-extinguisher in order to be able to act fast and efficiently in case of beginning fires.

Such instruction should be given by a qualified instructor.

 Strike knob (3) hard, then release again.

Extinguishing agent Each fire-extinguisher is filled with 12 kg (26.4 lb) Glutex. This extinguishing agent is used for fighting fires of classes A, B and C. Fires are extinguished fast, perfectly and without residues.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

 Operate the extinguishing gun.

Inspection Have the extinguisher inspected at regular intervals by an expert. This is required by local authorities and insurance companies and is in the interest of your own safety.

Have the fire-extinguisher checked at the prescribed intervals by authorized testing agencies.

2-29

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Automatic fire-extinguishing system (optional) The automatic fire-extinguishing system prevents fire from spreading. It is, however, assumed that the machine is thoroughly cleaned of combustible and easily flammable substances.

The hydraulic shovel operator and the maintenance personnel must familiarize themselves with the automatic fire-extinguishing system.

Such instruction should be given by a qualified instructor.

The fire-extinguishing system is activated automatically in an emergency.

Refill extinguishers immediately after use ready for further deployment.

Inspection Have the extinguishing system inspected regularly by an expert. This is required by authorities and insurance companies and is in the interest of your own safety.

Have the fire-extinguishing system checked at the prescribed intervals by authorized testing agencies.

Manual activation  Pull out ring (1, Fig. 2-44:) on activating unit for the corresponding extinguishing circuit.  Strike knob (2) hard.

(Fig. 2-45:) shows an activating unit in the drivers cab.

In an emergency the fire-extinguishing system is actuated automatically.

Nevertheless particular extinguishing circuit e. g. engine 1 or 2 (LH or RH) can be actuated manually.

Fig. 2-44:

Fig. 2-45:

2-30

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Harness (optional) Elements of the harness (Fig. 2-46:- Fig. 2-48:) Pos. Designation 1

Back support

2

Shoulder belt

3

Shoulder belt

4

Loop (chest belt)

5

Loop (chest belt)

6

Loop (back support)

11

Holding device

12

Fall arrester

13

Guidance line

14

Hanging up line

15

Handbag with harness

16

Snap hook

17

Hook safety device

Fig. 2-47:

Fig. 2-48:

Important hints Read and observe also: Operating instructions of the supplier.

Fig. 2-46:

Before using operator shall have received adequate training.

The harness must be used by one person only.

He is responsible for the appropriate use and maintenance.

Visual inspection is recommended prior to each use; if necessary it must be checked by an expert.

Harness must be checked annualy (every 12 month) by an expert.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-31

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Taking on harness  Take harness out of handbag (15, Fig. 2-49:)

 Pull loop (6) of the back support (1) between your legs to the front (Fig. 2-51:)  Pull loop (5, Fig. 2-52:) through loop (6).

Fig. 2-49:

 Take on shoulder belts (2 and 3, Fig. 2-50:)

Fig. 2-52:

 Pull loop (4, Fig. 2-52:) through loop (5).  Press the hooking safety device (17, Fig. 2-52:) of the snap hook (16).

Fig. 2-50:

 Pull back support (1, Fig. 2-50:) behind your body (Fig. 2-51:) The loops (4 and 5) are in front of your body.

Fig. 2-53:

Fig. 2-51:

2-32

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

 Hang up loop (4, Fig. Fig. 2-54:) into snap hook (16)

If you have the harness put on in such a way in case of danger you can escape from the hydraulic shovel (Fig. Fig. 2-56:).

Fig. 2-54:

 Release hooking safety device (17, Fig. 2-55:)

Fig. 2-56:

Fig. 2-55:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-33

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation MONITORING, WARNING AND CONTROL ELEMENTS

Fig. 2-57:

2-34

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation (Fig. 2-57:) BCS, Board-Control-System No. 1

2

3

4

Element BCS

Function Electronic system for measured data acquisition and processing

Board Control System, acquisition and display of important operating data of the hydraulic shovel.

Monitor

BCS

The monitor displays collected operating data, warning messages and – if needed – instruction for help.

Push-button

Navigation in menus Control of cursor movements, program selection within the BCS, confirmation of inputs / displayed values (Enter), quitting of menus / sub-menus Numeric keypad Input of numeric values.

Push-button

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Symbol

The surface of the monitor is sensitive to the touch (touch-screen technology). A touchscreen permits selecting menus and programs by touching graphic control symbols and to recall, for instance operating data of the hydraulic shovel.

For further information please refer to section 5 of this Operating Instructions, chapter “Board-Control-System”.

2-35

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-58

2-36

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation (Fig. 2-58) BCS, Board Control System, display screen example (For further information please refer to section 5 of this Operating Instructions, chapter “Board-ControlSystem”).

No. 1

2

3

4 5 6

Element

Function

Status line

Indicates activated functions and operating hours.

The symbols displayed are those of the switches in the control column

Touch-screen Monitor

BCS

Indicates collected operating data graphically and / or numerically, displays warning messages, fault messages and – if needed – instructions for help.

Pushbutton

Navigation in menus

Control of cursor movements, program selection within the BCS, confirmation of inputs / displayed values (Enter), quitting of menus / sub-menus

Push-button

Numeric keypad

Input of numeric values.

Touch-screen buttons Status line

Examples Fault messages

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Symbol

Displays fault messages as a code number and as plain text. The "Fault" button permits displaying further fault messages stored in the system.

2-37

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-59:

2-38

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation (Fig. 2-59:)

No. 31

Element Switch

Function Battery main switch

Shuts off the whole electrical system from the batteries.

Key-switch

Switches the electrical system on and off.

33

Buzzer (inside the control column)

Gives three acoustic warning signals if a fault is reported. The signals appear every 30 seconds.

34

Socket connectors

Connection of electronic devices for fault diagnosis purposes.

32

35

Switch

Emergency shut-off

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Symbol

De-energizes the outputs of the electronic control units: The engines are shut off, all valves are deenergized, working movements no longer possible. (see: "Emergency shut-off function").

2-39

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-60:

2-40

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation (Fig. 2-60:)

Engine 1 (LH), control and monitoring All switches and pushbuttons have an illuminated symbol face.

The opposite side is equipped with an LED. The LED lights up when the switch / pushbutton is actuated.

No. 41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

Element

Function

Push-button

Start

Starting of the engine. For starting, press the push-button face with the symbol.

Push-button

Stop

Stopping of the engine. For stopping, press the push-button face with the symbol.

Push-button

Idle

Stopping of the engine with an after-run delay of 5 min. For delayed stopping, press the push-button face with the symbol.

Warning lamp

Engine oil pressure

Lit up when the engine oil pressure is too low.

Warning lamp

Alternator

Lit up when the batteries are not being charged or in the event of an alternator defect.

Warning lamp

Engine oil temperature

Lit up when the engine oil temperature is too high.

Warning lamp

Cooling liquid temperature

Lit up when the engine cooling liquid temperature is too high.

Switch

Engine speed

Press switch face without symbol: the speed of the engine increases.

Symbol

Press the switch face with the symbol: the speed of the engine reduces.

49

50

Warning lamp

WARNING

Lamp is lit up in the event of a fault on the left engine 1. A perodic acoustic warning signal sounds and the BCS displays "PLEASE CHECK" as well as the fault description.

The engine can still be operated but the engine electronic unit possibly reduces engine power.

Contact the responsible service personnel soon.

Warning lamp

STOP

Lamp is lit up in the event of a critical fault on the left engine 1. A perodic acoustic warning signal sounds and the BCS displays "ENGINE STOP" as well as a fault description.

Shut off engine.

Contact the responsible service personnel immediately.

Warning lamp can display the faults stored in the fault memory of the left engine electronic unit as flashing sequences (see: "Operation and Maintenance Manual" for the engine).

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-41

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-61:

2-42

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation (Fig. 2-61:)

Engine 2 (RH), control and monitoring All switches and pushbuttons have an illuminated symbol face.

The opposite side is equipped with an LED. The LED lights up when the switch / pushbutton is actuated.

No. Element Function Symbol Starting of the engine.

For starting, press the Push-button Start 51 push-button face with the symbol.

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

Push-button

Stop

Stopping of the engine. For stopping, press the push-button face with the symbol.

Push-button

Idle

Warning lamp

Engine oil pressure

Stopping of the engine with an after-run delay of 5 min. For delayed stopping, press the push-button face with the symbol..

Lit up when the engine oil pressure is too low.

Warning lamp

Alternator

Warning lamp

Engine oil temperature

Lit up when the batteries are not being charged or in the event of an alternator defect.

Lit up when the engine oil temperature is too high.

Warning lamp

Cooling liquid temperature

Lit up when the engine cooling liquid temperature is too high.

Switch

Engine speed

Warning lamp

WARNING

Warning lamp

STOP

Press switch face without symbol: the speed of the engine increases.

Press the switch face with the symbol: the speed of the engine reduces.

Lamp is lit up in the event of a fault on the right engine 2. A perodic acoustic warning signal sounds and the BCS displays "PLEASE CHECK" as well as the fault description.

The engine can still be operated but the engine electronic unit possibly reduces engine power.

Contact the responsible service personnel soon.

Lamp is lit up in the event of a critical fault on the right engine 2. A perodic acoustic warning signal sounds and the BCS displays "ENGINE STOP" as well as the fault description.

Shut off engine.

Contact the responsible service personnel immediately.

Warning lamp can display the faults stored in the fault memory of the right engine electronic unit as flashing sequences (see: "Operation and Maintenance Manual" for the engine).

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-43

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-62:

2-44

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation (Fig. 2-62:) All switches and pushbuttons have an illuminated symbol face.

The opposite side is equipped with an LED. The LED lights up when the switch / pushbutton is actuated.

No. 61

Element Push-button

Function Superstructure holding brake

Symbol

Blocks the superstructure.

Press this button when the superstructure is stationary.

Do not use this button while the superstructure is still in motion.

Risk of damage to the brake and the swing gearboxes.

Not connected.

62 63

Switch

Hydraulic shovel parking brake

Not actuated: The parking brake is applied automatically ca. 5 secs after the hydraulic shovel has stopped moving.

The parking brake is released automatically when the "Travel" function is activated.

Press the switch face with the symbol: The parking brake is applied permanently.

The hydraulic shovel cannot be moved.

Actuate this switch only when the hydraulic shovel is stationary.

Do not use this switch while the hydraulic shovel is still in motion.

Risk of damage to the brakes and the travel gearboxes.

64

Push-button

Central greasing system reset

Reset function of the central greasing system control (Press for at least 3 sec.).

Press switch face without symbol: Resets the control of the superstructure.

Press the switch face with the symbol: Resets the control of the undercarriage.

65

Push-button

Emergency lowering

Lowering of the working equipment, for instance, if the engines have failed.

Press and hold the switch face with the symbol using at the same time the control lever to lower the working equipment.

66

Switch

Automatic speed reduction

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Reduces the speed of the diesel engines to about 1000 min-1, if no working movement is being executed during about 8 seconds.

2-45

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-63:

2-46

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation (Fig. 2-63:) All switches and pushbuttons have an illuminated symbol face.

The opposite side is equipped with an LED. The LED lights up when the switch / pushbutton is actuated.

No. 71

72

Function

Element Switch

Servo-control

Press the switch face with the symbol: The electro-hydraulic servo-control is enabled.

Switch

Travelling speed

Not actuated: 1st travelling stage travelling forwards / backwards is possible

Symbol

Press the switch face with the symbol: 2nd travelling stage, only parallel forward travel is possible. in case of backward travel and cornering, the machine switches back automatically into the 1st travelling stage.

Not connected.

73 74

Monitoring lamps

Engine oil interval prolongation

Not connected.

75 76

81 82 83 84 85 86

Lamp is lit up, when the right or the left pump of the prolongation system is running.

Push-button

When the machine has to be manoeuvered out of dangerous situations

Press the switch face with the symbol: The machine can be driven and the superstructure be swung although these functions are automatically deactivated.

Use this function only in dangerous situations to manouever yourself or the machine out of hazard zones. Risk of damaging parts of the machine, e.g. the hydraulic ladder or the tanklift.

Switch

Floodlamps

Switches the floodlamps on the driver´s cab on and off.

Switch

Floodlamps

Switches the floodlamps on the hydraulic oil cooler module on and off.

Switch

Floodlamps

Switches the floodlamps on the cab module on and off.

Switch

Floodlamps

Switches the floodlamps on the boomon and off.

Switch

Floodlamps rear

Switches the floodlamps on the counterweight on and off.

Switch

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Not connected.

2-47

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-64:

2-48

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation (Fig. 2-64:) All switches and pushbuttons have an illuminated symbol face.

The opposite side is equipped with an LED. The LED lights up when the switch / pushbutton is actuated.

No.

Element

Function

91

Push-button

Dumper count

Press the switch face with the symbol: Resets the loaded dumper count.

92

Switch

Windscreen wiper

Press the switch face with the symbol: Windscreen wiper in intermittent operation mode.

Symbol

Press the switch face without symbol: Windscreen wiper in permanent operation mode.

93

Pushbutton

Windscreen washer

Press the switch face with the symbol: Windscreen wiper in wipe/wash operation.

94

Switch

Rotary beacon (option)

Press the switch face with the symbol: Rotary beacon ON.

95

Switch

Lighting

Press the switch face with the symbol: Switches on the maintenance lights in the modules.

96

Switch

Lighting

Press the switch face with the symbol: Switches on the lights in the driver's cab.

97

Outlet

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

For connecting electrical driven devices, e. g. for charging small accumulators.

Operating voltage: 12 Volts.

Maximum power output: 120 Watts.

2-49

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-65:

2-50

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation (Fig. 2-65:) No. Element 101 Push-button

(Free for options)

102 Push-button

Stick floating position (shovel equipment only)

Function Symbol Can be used as a push-to-speak button on a radio, or to switch over from one camera to another one.

Button is pressed: The stick cylinders are pressurized on retracting.

Press button (102) only in position "0" of control lever (115).

103

Push-button

Boom floating position

Button is pressed: The boom cylinders are pressurized on retracting.

Press button (103) only in position "0" of control lever (116).

104 105

111 112 113 114 115

116

117 118

Push-button Push-button inside the seat

Pedal Pedal Pedal

Button is pressed: Acoustic warning signal / horn is activated.

Electronic hydraulic Button in the seat.

The electronic hydraulic shovel control shovel control (servo-control) is activated when the drivers (servo-control) sits down on the seat.

The electronic hydraulic shovel control (servo-control) is deactivated when he leaves the seat.

Shovel trap (shovel Forwards – shovel trap is opened; Backwards – shovel trap is closed. equipment only) Forwards – forward travel; Travel, left track Backwards – backward travel.

Forwards – forward travel; Travel, right track Backwards – backward travel.

Warning signal

Footrest Control lever

Control lever

Push-button Push-button

Shovel trap (shovel equipment only) By-pass for the automatically switch off for stickand /or backhoe cylinders (Option)

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Forwards – raising the stick Backwards – lowering the stick.

To the left / right – swinging and braking of the superstructure.

Forwards – lowering the boom; Backwards – raising the boom.

To the left – backwards tipping of shovel / bucket; To the right – dumping of shovel / bucket.

Forwards – shovel trap is opened; Backwards – shovel trap is closed.

To the left – automatically stopped stickand/or backhoe cylinders can be driven slowly to the limit stopps.

To the right – Each press on the button increments the loaded dumper count for by "1".

(Count reset with button (91)

2-51

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-66:

2-52

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation (Fig. 2-66:) (Engine 1 (left) monitoring) Function

No.

Element

121

Monitoring device

Engine monitoring Indicates different parameters on the display (E) (engine 1 left) Use push buttons (C and D) to scroll through parameter list.

Indicator lamps (A and B) lit when an active fault occurs.

122

Thermometer

Engine temperature (engine 1 left)

123

Pressure gauge

Engine oil pressure Indicates the oil pressure in the diesel engine lubricating system. (engine 1 left)

124

Warning device

Engine monitoring (engine 1 left)

Symbol

Indicates the cooling-water temperature.

Gives an acoustic warning signal if a fault is reported, e.g. 

Engine oil pressure too low,



Engine temperature too high.

Lower the equipment to the ground and shut off engine immediately if the warning device (124) sounds. The warning device (124) continues to sound until the fault has been rectified.

Lits up when engine is in idle phase.

125

Indicator lamp

Idle (engine 1 left)

126

Warning lamp

Cooling water level Lits up when the cooling-water level is too low. (engine 1 left)

127

Warning lamp

Alternator (engine 1 left)

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Lits up when the batteries are not recharged.

2-53

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-67:

2-54

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation (Fig. 2-67:) (Engine 2 (right) monitoring) Function

No.

Element

131

Monitoring device

Engine monitoring Indicates different parameters on the display (E) (engine 2 right) Use push buttons (C and D) to scroll through parameter list.

Indicator lamps (A and B) lit when an active fault occurs.

132

Thermometer

Engine temperature (engine 2 right)

133

Pressure gauge

Engine oil pressure Indicates the oil pressure in the diesel engine lubricating system. (engine 2 right)

134

Warning device

Engine monitoring (engine 2 right)

Symbol

Indicates the cooling-water temperature.

Gives an acoustic warning signal if a fault is reported, e.g. 

Engine oil pressure too low,



Engine temperature too high.

Lower the equipment to the ground and shut off engine immediately if the warning device (134) sounds. The warning device (134) continues to sound until the fault has been rectified.

Lits up when engine is in idle phase.

135

Indicator lamp

Idle (engine 2 right)

136

Warning lamp

Cooling water level Lits up when the cooling-water level is too low. (engine 2 right)

137

Warning lamp

Alternator (engine 2 right)

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Lits up when the batteries are not recharged.

2-55

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-68:

2-56

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation (Fig. 2-68:) (Options. Depending on the options ordered with the machine, the described elements can be found on different positions on the control column).

Nr. 140 141 142 143 144

Funksjon

Element Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch

Auxiliary heating (option) Auxiliary heating blower (option) Auxiliary heating (option) Fuel Pre-heating (option) Fuel Pre-heating (option)

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Symbol

Auxiliary heating for driver's cab ON / OFF. Blower levels 1,2,3.

Auxiliary heating for driver's cab ON / OFF. Automatic regulation.

Switches the fuel pre-heating function of RH engine on and off.

Switches the fuel pre-heating function of LH engine on and off.

2-57

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-69:

2-58

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation (Fig. 2-69:) Air conditioner (Option. Depending on the options ordered with the machine, the described elements can be found on different positions on the control column).

No. 150 151 152

Function

Element

Blower levels 1,2,3.

Knob

Blower of air conditioner Thermostat

Rotary switch

Selector

Selects the following functions: heating, cooling, ventilation, defrosting.

Rotary switch

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Symbol

Presetting of desired temperature.

2-59

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Fig. 2-70:

2-60

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation (Fig. 2-70:) Air filter monitoring (Option. Depending on the options ordered with the machine, the described elements can be found on different positions on the control column).

Function

No.

Element

191

Underpressure gauge

Air filter (left engine 1, outside)

192

Underpressure gauge

Air filter (left engine 1, inside)

193

Underpressure gauge

Air filter (right engine 2, outside)

194

Underpressure gauge

Air filter (right engine 2, inside)

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Symbol

Indicates the underpressure in the air filter.

Underpressure must be less than 635 mm water column.

Indicates the underpressure in the air filter.

Underpressure must be less than 635 mm water column.

Indicates the underpressure in the air filter.

Underpressure must be less than 635 mm water column.

Indicates the underpressure in the air filter.

Underpressure must be less than 635 mm water column.

2-61

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation PUTTING THE MACHINE INTO OPERATION Before daily start-up, carry out works in accordance with servicing plan T (see: Part 3 "Inspection and servicing") Increased fire and explosion hazard will exist.

Prior to your daily start-up, make sure the machine has been cleaned of combustible and easily flammable substances.

Refuelling Refuelling - Safety instructions Explosion hazard. Risk of fire.

Fuels and fuel gases are inflammable.

Avoid open flames and stop smoking.

Fuel may cause skin injury. Wear protective gloves or use a barrier cream.

Stand working equipment on the ground.

Shut off the engines.

Do not spill fuel and do not allow fuel to penetrate into the soil. Fuel pollutes the environment.

Reducing the operator's exposure to noise All noise protection devices of the machine must be in place and fully functional when the machine is in operation.

Wipe off spilt fuel immediately with cleaning rags or soak up with binding agents.

Fuel and cleaning material must be disposed of without polluting the environment.

Report fuel accidents immediately to the user or his representative.

e.g. 

doors, flaps and vover of the engine compartments must be closed,



access doors to the compartments of the radiator fans must not be left open,



the cab door must be closed,



the exhaust silencer must be checked for holes,



the screwed conections of all components fastend with screws must be checked for tightness. Loose components tend to vibrate and to rattle, thus increasing the noise level.

Check the grounding straps (equipotential bonding) at the tank lift regularly for proper fastening.

Grounding straps can remove voltages and prevent fire during refuelling only when properly fastened.

Wear ear protectors when leaving the driver's cab with the engines on and running.

2-62

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Back-up heating (option), filling in fuel The fuel reservoir for the back-up heating system is located in the module below the driver’s cab (Fig. 2-71:).  Fill in clean fuel through the filler neck.

Service station (tanklift) The hydraulic shovel is equipped with a central service station (Fig. 2-72: resp. Fig. 2-73:) for refuelling. The service station is attached to the frame and accessible from the ground below the uppercarriage.

A service vehicle is needed for filling and/or draining of the fluids.

Fig. 2-72:

Fig. 2-71:

Fig. 2-73:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-63

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Express couplings are provided for refilling the following consumables (fluids): Note: Connections used may vary depending on how the machine is equipped.

Pos. Fluid Express coupling for Fig. 2-74: 1 Diesel fuel for lefthand filling and righthand fuel tank 2 Cooling fluid for leftFilling and/or hand engine draining 3 Cooling fluid for Filling and/or righthand engine draining 4 Gearbox oil for left Filling and/or pump transfer geardraining box 5 Gearbox oil for right Filling and/or pump transfer geardraining box 6 Tank for engine oil Filling and/or interval prolongation draining lefthand engine.

7 Tank for engine oil Filling and/or interval prolongation draining lefthand engine.

8 Engine oil for lefthand Filling and/or engine draining 9 Engine oil for Filling and/or righthand engine draining 10 Hydraulic oil tank Filling and/or draining 11 Grease container filling

Fig. 2-75:

Lowering the service station Draw out control knob (21, Fig. 2-75:) of valve (22) with rope (25). The service station is brought down to the lower position. Turn knob (21) by 90° and engage.

Raising the service station Disengage control knob (21) of valve (22), turn by 90° and press in. The service station is raised to the top position.

Refilling and draining For filling in or for draining fluids, unscrew the cap of the corresponding express coupling (Fig. 2-74:).

Attach express coupling of filling hose from the service vehicle to the corresponding express coupling at the service station. Fill in or drain off fluid.

Take off filling hose and refit cap on the express coupling.

Fig. 2-74:

2-64

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Assemblies resp. Measuring device reservoirs Fuel tank BCS fuel indicator (Fig. 2-76:)

Remarks Switch on the monitoring system by using toggle switch (23, Fig. 2-77:). The indicator light (22) comes on.

Fill in fuel using express coupling (1).

The indicator light (32) comes on when the LH fuel tank is full.

Stop filling when the fuel tank is full.

The indicator light (33) comes on when the RH fuel tank is full.

Stop filling when the fuel tank is full.

Switch off the monitoring system by using toggle switch (23), indicator light (22) is off.

Filling in fuel without using the service station Fuel can also be filled in by means of the filler neck in each fuel tank (1, Fig. 2-78:).  Unscrew cap of filler tube.  Fill in fuel through the filter sieve in the filler tube.

Do not remove the sieve!

A micro filter in the filling line is recommended.

Fig. 2-76:

Fig. 2-78:

Fig. 2-77:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-65

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Assemblies resp. Measuring device reservoirs Pump transfer Dipstick (1, Fig. 2-79:) gearboxes

Engines

Dipstick (1, Fig. 2-81:)

Engine oil tanks

Monitoring lamps (1 and 2, Fig. 2-82:)

Remarks Fill in gear oil using express couplings (4 and 5, Fig. 2-80:).

Stop filling when the oil reaches the "max" mark on the dipstick (see: Part 3, chapter "Pump transfer gearbox Checking the gearbox oil level/Filling in oil").

Fill in engine oil using express couplings (8 and 9, Fig. 2-82:).

Stop filling when the oil reaches the "max" mark on the dipstick (see: chapter "Engine - engine oil level/filling in oil").

Small amounts of oil can be filled in through the filler neck (2, Fig. 2-81:) at the engine.

Fill in engine oil using express couplings (6 and 7, Fig. 2-82:).

Stop filling when monitoring lamps (1 and / or 2) lit up, (see: chapter "Engine , filling in oil").

Fig. 2-81: Fig. 2-79:

Fig. 2-80:

2-66

Fig. 2-82:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Assemblies resp. Measuring device reservoirs

Remarks

Hydraulic oil tank

Checking the oil level: Extend the piston rods of stick and bucket cylinders halfway.

Stand working equipment on the ground (see Fig. 2-84:).

Check oil level at an oil temperature of ca. 50 °C / 122°F, with the engines stationary.

Fill in oil through express coupling (10, Fig. 2-85:) when the oil level in the inspection glass has dropped below the "min" mark.

Stop filling if the acoustic warning signal “Travel Alarm” sounds and oil reaches the "max" mark on the inspection glass (see: chapter "Hydraulic system - Checking the hydraulic oil level / Refilling hydraulic oil").

Inspection glass (1, Fig. 2-83:), sign (2. Fig. 2-83: and Fig. 2-84:)

Fig. 2-83:

Fig. 2-85:

Fig. 2-84:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-67

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

Assemblies resp. Measuring device reservoirs

Remarks

Cooling system reservoir

Level indicator (4, Fig. 2-86:) Fill in cooling fluid using express couplings (2 and/or 3, Fig. 2-88:). Stop filling when the level indicator indicates maximum filling level. (see: chapter "Cooling system Cooling liquid").

Grease container BCS display (Fig. 2-87:) BCS gives a warning if the grease container is nearly – cental lubricating empty. system Switch on the display system (optional) with the toggle switch (23), indicator lamp (22) comes on.

Fill in grease using express coupling (11, Fig. 2-89:).

Stop filling when the grease container is full, the indicator lamp (34) lights up.

On completion of filling, switch the display system off again with the toggle switch (23), indicator lamp (22) is off.

Fig. 2-86:

Fig. 2-88:

Fig. 2-89: Fig. 2-87:

2-68

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Switching the electrical system on and off The electrical system is switched on with keyswitch (32, Fig. 2-90:).  Insert key into key-switch and turn to the right.

If the electrical system cannot be switched on, check first whether the battery main switch is on (see: "Shutting off the supply voltage (battery main switch)").

Engines, emergency shut-off In an emergency, the engines can be stopped out of full load.

To do so:  Depress the emergency shut-off switch (35, Fig. 2-91:). The engines are stopped. (see the chapter "Emergency shut-off function").  Switch off the electrical system with key-switch (32).

Fig. 2-91: Fig. 2-90:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-69

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Preheating system for engine and hydraulic oil (optional)

Switch and pilot lamp are located at the switchgear cabinet in the engine module behind the hydraulic oil reservoir (Fig. 2-93:).

Preheating system for engine and hydraulic oil, function

When the temperatures of the engine oil, engine coolant and the hydraulic oil are below -10°C / 14°F:

The preheating system consists of heating elements for engine oil, engine coolant and hydraulic oil.

At low outside temperatures, the system facilitates starting of the engine and ensures that the hydraulic system reaches its operating temperature faster.

The preheating system is operated electrically with an external supply voltage. This voltage is available at a socket outlet at the service-station (tanklift) (Fig. 2-92:).

(The system has been set at the factory for a standard supply of 400 volts, threephase AC. Other voltages are available on request as well as socket outlets meeting other standards).

 Connect the system to the external power supply.  Switch on the preheating system with switch (1, Fig. 2-93:).

The pilot lamp (2, Fig. 2-93:) lights up.  Switch off the preheating system with switch (1, , Fig. 2-93:) when the engine and the hydraulic system have reached a temperature above 0°C / 32°F. The pilot lamp (4, Fig. 2-93:) goes out.  Switch on the fuel preheating system (see "Fuel preheating system (option)").

Switching the preheating system for engine and hydraulic oil on and off Risk of an electric shock.

Check first: Insulation of the socket outlet on the machine in good condition?

Insulation of the connecting cable in good condition?

Connect the system to the power supply only if the insulation of the components is in perfect condition.

Fig. 2-92:

Observe the national safety regulations to be applied in the presence of electric current.

Fig. 2-93:

2-70

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Fuel preheating system (optional) Fuel preheating system, function At temperatures below 0°C / 32°F, the paraffin particles contained in the diesel fuel begin to clump together. They form flakes which clog up the fuel lines and the filters. Starting of the engine is then no longer possible.

To prevent this, the diesel fuel must be preheated.

Preheating is effeceted by means of two heating elements in the fuel line. The heating elements are attached to the engines.

They are equipped with internal thermostats ensuring an automatic temperature regulation.

Switch on the fuel preheating only after preheating of the engine and of the hydraulic oil is terminated (see "Preheating system for engine and hydraulic oil (option)").

The preheating time is dependent on the outside temperature.

Fig. 2-94:

Switching the fuel preheating system on and off  Switch on the ignition by turning key-switch (32, Fig. 2-94:) to position 1.  At temperatures below 0°C / 32°F, switch on the fuel preheating: switch (144, Fig. 2-95:) for the lefthand engine, switch (143) for the righthand engine.

The pilot lamp located above the resp. switch lights up.

Fig. 2-95:

 After a short time start up the engines (see also "Starting and stopping the engines").  Switch off the fuel preheating with switches (143 and 144), when the engines has reached their operating temperatures.

The pilot lamp (Fig. 2-95:) goes out.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-71

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINES Starting the engines

Starting the left-hand engine

Exhaust gases from diesel engines and some of their constituents may cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm.

Start and operate combustion engines only on well-ventilated premises. In closed rooms, exhaust gases must be evacuated to the outside.

Do not work on the exhaust system an do not make any modifications to it.

All control levers and pedals must be in position "0".

Pull out all emergency shut-off switches.

Fig. 2-96:

Pull out both switches for the battery main switch.

Check for persons on the machine. Do not start engines until all persons have left the machine.

Starting the right-hand engine

Activate the horn before you start the engines to give a warning signal to people around.

Start the engines one after another.  Switch on the electrical system with key-switch (32).

Warning lamps (44 – 47, Fig. 2-96:) and (54 – 57, Fig. 2-97:) light up.

The engine starts up only after the lubrication pressure has built up inside the engine.

An acoustic warning signal sounds.  Press button (41, Fig. 2-96:) to start the lefthand engine. Release button (41) as soon as the engine has fired.

Warning lamps (44 – 47) go out.  Press button (51, Fig. 2-97:) to start the righthand engine. Release button (51) as soon as the engine has fired.

Warning lamps (54 – 57) go out.

2-72

Fig. 2-97:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Repeat the starting procedure if one of the engines does not fire. Repeat starting procedure not more often than three to four times. Do not operate the starter for more than 10 seconds.

Engines – adjusting the speed

If warning lamps (44 – 47, Fig. 2-96:) or (54 – 57, Fig. 2-97:) do not go out or when the BCS (Fig. 2-98:) displays a fault message after starting, the engine concerned must be stopped immediately.

Adjust the speed of the right-hand engine with switch (58, Fig. 2-97:).

Locate the cause of the fault and rectify before restarting the engine.

At low temperatures it is not possible to arbitrary adjust engine speed as long as the engines are cold.

Adjust the speed of the left-hand engine with switch (48, Fig. 2-96:).

 Press the switch face without symbol the engine speed is raised up to maximum speed.  Press the switch face with the symbol the engine speed is reduced to idling speed.

This prevents the engines from too high speed.

Too high speed could seriously damage cold engines.

The engines are equipped with an automatic control for the warm-up phase. Engine electronic (ECM) controls the duration of the warm-up phase depending on the coolant, fuel and intake manifold temperatures.

At coolant temperature below -4°C (25°F) the warm-up phase can take up to ten minutes. During this warm-up phase it is impossible to increase engine speed.

Starting the engines at low temperatures If the machine is used in low temperatures, the engine may be equipped with a cold-starting device.

The pressure vessel containing the cold-starting fluid (ether) can be installed in or near the engine compartment.

The vessel is screwed into an electro-mechanical metering valve. When the engine is started at temperatures below 0°C (32°F), this valve is activated automatically by the engine electronics and injects a precisely metered amount of cold-starting fluid into the air intake duct of the engine.

Ether is toxic and highly inflammable. Safety instructions and information concerning the handling of pressure vessels for cold-starting fluids (ether) can be found in the following chapters: "Fundamental safety instructions", "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions", "Cold-starting fluid (ether) - Replacing the pressure vessel".

Fig. 2-98:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-73

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Shutting off the engines

Shutting off the left-hand engine

During interruptions of the work and after the work, stand working equipment on the ground.

Do not shut off the engines before the working equipment rests on the ground.

Do not shut off the engine out of full load. The engine should be run at no more than one-half of the rated rpm for another 5 minutes to allow the lubricating oil and the cooling liquid to dissipate the combustion heat from the combustion chamber and from bearings and shafts.  Reduce the speed of the engines to idling by pressing the left side of the speed adjusting switches (48, Fig. 2-99:) and (58, Fig. 2-100:).  Press button (42, Fig. 2-99:) for the left-hand engine. The left-hand engine is stopped.

Warning lamps (44 – 47) light up.  Press button (52, Fig. 2-100:) for the righthand engine. The left-hand engine is stopped.

Warning lamps (54 – 57) light up.

Fig. 2-99:

Shutting off the right-hand engine

 Switch off the electrical system with key-switch (32).

Warning lamps (44 – 47, Fig. 2-99:) and (54 – 57, Fig. 2-100:) go out.

The engines will be shut off with a delay of a few seconds. During this time, the current operating data are saved and the electronic units shut down.

Fig. 2-100:

2-74

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation AIR CONDITIONER (OPTIONAL) Control unit (SIGMA) The illustration (Fig. 2-101:) shows a control unit for a dual air conditioner. The control unit of a single air conditioning system contains the control elements only once.

Unit 1 Pos. Element 1 Rotary switch 2

Thermostat

3

Rotary switch

Unit 2 Pos. Element 4 Rotary switch 5

Thermostat

6

Rotary switch

Function selects the intensity level of the blower (3 levels) sets the desired temperature inside the cab selects the desired control function (heating, cooling, ventilation, defrosting)

Fig. 2-101:

Function selects the intensity level of the blower (3 levels) sets the desired temperature inside the cab selects the desired control function (heating, cooling, ventilation, defrosting)

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-75

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Back-up heating driver’s cab (optional) The back-up heating for the driver’s cab is located in the module below the driver’ cab (Fig. 2-102:).

The heating consists of one or two heating units (1) and the fuel reservoir (2).  Switch on the back-up heating using switch (142, Fig. 2-103:). The pilot lamp above switch (142) lights up.

The heating system has an automatic regulation.

Do not switch on the back-up heating when the air conditioner is set to ”cooling”.

Fig. 2-102:

Fig. 2-103:

2-76

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Back-up heating (optional) The back-up heating is located in the module below the driver’ cab (Fig. 2-104:).

The heating system uses the engine cooling fluid.

Therefore full heating power is available after the engines reach their operating temperature.

Before switching on the blower, turn the valves (arrow, Fig. 2-104:) into direction of flow.

The back-up heating control elements are located at the control column unit (Fig. 2-105:).

Do not switch on the back-up heating when the air conditioner is set to ”cooling”.

Fig. 2-105:

Control unit (Fig. 2-105:): Pos. Element

Fig. 2-104:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Function

1

Indicator lamp heating ON

2

Indicator lamp blower ON

3

Indicator lamp heating

4

Indicator lamp cooling

5

Switch

heating ON

6

Switch

blower ON

7

Indicator lamp blower level 3

8

Indicator lamp blower level 2

9

Indicator lamp blower level 1

2-77

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation A loss of performance and higher wear must be accepted when the machine works in an inclined position, e.g. when building a ramp or when swinging uphill.

For the building of ramps, the values specified in the table "Maximum inclinations during working operations" may be exceeded. In this case, however, a reduced service life of the components can be expected.

During downtimes, the machine must be parked in such a way that its inclination does not exceed 3° / 5.2 %

MAXIMUM MACHINE INCLINATIONS, INFORMATION

The machine must not exceed the inclinations indicated for working, travelling and servicing operations and during downtimes. The values specified in the tables below are valid for all types of working equipment.

If the maximum inclinations are exceeded, there is a risk of severe damage to the engines due to insufficient lubrication. In the event of extreme inclinations the machine can topple over.

The working performance of the machine is especially economical when the machine stands on firm and level ground.

Maximum machine inclinations during working operations:

forward inclination

rearward inclination

side inclination

5° / 8.7%

5° / 8.7%

5° / 8.7%

Maximum machine inclinations during travelling: Type

Engine

6015

QSK19 30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7% C18

forward deg / %

rearward deg / %

side deg / %

Type

Engine

6040

KTA38 30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7%

30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7%

C32 6050

6018

C18

30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7%

forward deg / %

rearward deg / %

side deg / %

30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7%

KTTA38 30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7% K1500E 30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7% QSK38 25° / 46.6% 25° / 46.6% 25° / 46.6%

6030

QSK19 30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7% C18

30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7% 30° / 57.7%

C27

25° / 46.6% 25° / 46.6% 25° / 46.6%

6060

QSK45 20° / 36.4% 20° / 36.4% 20° / 36.4% C3512C 24° / 44.5% 24° / 44.5% 24° / 44.5%

6090

QSK60 20° / 36.4% 20° / 36.4% 20° / 36.4%

Maximum machine inclinations during maintenance operations:

2-78

forward inclination

rearward inclination

side inclination

0° - 2° / 3.4%

0° - 2° / 3.4%

0° - 2° / 3.4%

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation TRAVELLING, SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Have the attachment raised only so far as to permit the machine to be driven under overhead power lines without any risk.

Close the cab door.

If the machine is fitted with a safety belt for the operator, fasten the belt.

If the superstructure is turned by more than 90° from the BASIC POSITION, the hydraulic shovel travels in the opposite direction to that selected.

If the position of the superstructure in relation to the undercarriage is not exactly known, touch the accelerator lightly to see which direction the machine takes, before initiating the full travelling movement.

Running-in specifications for components of the crawler tracks: Prior to initial commissioning and/or after repair work, run in the idlers, track rollers and support rollers as follow:  Raise the working equipment (Fig. 2-106:).  Drive the hydraulic shovel in reverse approx. 50 m (164 ft).  Drive the hydraulic shovel in forwards approx. 50 m (164 ft).  Stop the hydraulic shovel.

Take the utmost care on slippery, greasy ground.

 Measure the temperature at each idler, track roller and support roller with an infrared thermometer. At a temperature of approx. 100° C (212°F) wait for idlers, track rollers and support rollers to cool down.

The engines must be at operating temperature before being subjected to full load.

 Repeat this running-in procedure up to 10 times.

If the machine is to be driven a longer distance, the superstructure must be secured against turning by means of the superstructure holding brake.

 Check all idlers, track rollers and support rollers for leaks.

Never drive across slopes.

Sound the horn to warn persons in the immediate vicinity before starting travelling.

Do not exceed the maximum machine inclination (see “Maximum machine inclinations, information” chapter).

Fig. 2-106:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-79

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation TRAVELLING Superstructure basic position Travel direction and sense of actuation of pedals (112 and 113, Fig. 2-108:) are identical only when the hydraulic shovel is in its BASIC POSITION (Fig. 2-107:).

Travelling forwards/backwards Travelling forwards:  depress pedals (112 and 113) forwards.

The hydraulic shovel travels in the direction of the idler (2, Fig. 2-107:).

Travelling backwards:  depress pedals (112 and 113, Fig. 2-108:) backwards.

The hydraulic shovel travels in the direction of the drive sprocket (4, Fig. 2-107:).

During travelling, an acoustic warning signal sounds (Travel Alarm).

Fig. 2-107:

If the superstructure is swung out of its basic position by more than 90° (Fig. 2-109:), the hydraulic shovel moves in a direction opposite to that expected when pedals (112 and 113, Fig. 2-108:) are depressed.

Fig. 2-109:

The pedals return automatically to their "0" positions when released.

Reverse the hydraulic shovel only over short distances and with the assistance of marshallers because of restricted rear-view conditions.

Do not travel across slopes.

When travelling uphill or downhill, the travel drive must always be at the rear.

Travel only in the basic position of the hydraulic shovel and only forwards.

Be extremely careful on slippery and greasy ground.

Fig. 2-108:

If the operator is not completely sure of the position of the superstructure with regard to the undercarriage, pedals (112 and 113) should be depressed slightly in order to find out which way the hydraulic shovel moves before initiating the full travelling movement.

2-80

Do not exceed the maximum machine inclination (see “Maximum machine inclinations, information” chapter).

All instructions with regard to travelling speed regulation and travel direction control are applicable only as long as the crawler tracks have sufficient grip and do not slip.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Regulating the travelling speed Travelling on level ground Regulate the travelling speed with  pedals (112 and 113, Fig. 2-110:) and  Switch (72, Fig. 2-111:) to the left (slow gear).

All forward/reverse travel movements are possible with this gear.  Switch (72, Fig. 2-111:) to the right (fast gear).

The hydraulic shovel can be driven only parallel forwards with this fast gear.

The travel gearbox changes automatically into the 1st gear as soon as another travelling function (e.g. reversing, cornering) is initiated.

Change speed range only when the hydraulic shovel is stationary.

Press engine speed regulator switches (48 and 58) to the left (full-throttled position).

Fig. 2-111:

Travelling uphill and downhill Read and observe the "Travelling Safety instructions" chapter.

Do not exceed the maximum machine inclination (see “Maximum machine inclinations, information” chapter).  Depress padals (112 and 113, Fig. 2-110:) fully to the limit stop.  Regulate the travel speed only with the engines speed control.

When travelling downhill, the travel retarder valve acts as a speed limiter.

The travel retarder valve works correctly if pedals (112 and 113) are fully depressed down to the limit stop.

Fig. 2-110:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Should the travelling speed become too high when travelling downhill release pedals (112 and 113) to stop the hydraulic shovel.

2-81

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Cornering Never use the working equipment to raise one side of the undercarriage and then turn the undercarriage by initiating the swinging and/or the travelling function.

To take a right-hand corner forwards  depress only pedal(112, Fig. 2-112:) forwards To take a lefthand corner forwards  depress only pedal (113) forwards -

Turning To turn to the right  depress pedal (112) forwards and pedal (113) backwards To turn to the left  depress pedal (113) forwards and pedal (112) backwards.

This way of working is contrary to the hydraulic shovel 's designated use.

There is a risk of accident. Moreover, the tracks, swing gear, roller bearing swing ring, backhoe or bucket back-wall and the front part of the bucket are subjected to inadmissibly high stresses.

Fig. 2-113:

Fig. 2-112:

Note Change the position of the undercarriage - parallel or perpendicular to the working face - only by cornering forwards/backwards (Fig. 2-113:).

Cornering to the left: forwards

from pos. 1 to pos. 2

backwards

from pos. 2 to pos. 3

forwards

from pos. 3 to pos. 4

The same procedure should be adopted if the hydraulic shovel is to be driven out of depressions (Fig. 2-114:): Cornering to the left

from pos. 1 to pos. 2

Cornering to the right

from pos. 2 to pos. 3

2-82

Fig. 2-114:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Travelling over long distances Travel only forwards with the hydraulic shovel in its basic position.

Travelling backwards over longer distances could damage parts of the undercarriage.

Read and observe the "Travelling – Safety instructions" chapter.

Do not exceed the maximum machine inclination (see “Maximum machine inclinations, information” chapter).

Loading bucket equipment (Fig. 2-115:):  Fully extend boom cylinder (1).  Extend bucket cylinder 2.  Extend stick cylinder 3.  Retract bucket cylinder 2 and stick cylinder (3) to such an extent as to reach the position of the equipment (Fig. 2-115:).

Lower the equipment when travelling underneath obstacles.

If the equipment position must be changed:

When travelling, pay attention to sufficient headroom, e. g. under cable bridges or high-tension cables.

 stop the hydraulic shovel,

Keep the loading or the backhoe bucket close to the ground. For a more uniform loading of the tracks, the equipment must, however, be kept at a steep angle (Fig. 2-115:).

 continue to travel.

 change the position, After travelling for 15 minutes without interruption, stop the hydraulic shovel and check the temperature of the track rollers.

If the temperature does not exceed approx. 100° C (212°F):  continue travelling.

In case of higher temperatures:  Stop travelling. Resume travelling only after the track rollers have cooled down to approx. 40° C (104°F).

Fig. 2-115:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-83

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Superstructure holding brake

Track parking brake

The hydraulic shovel is equipped with six superstructure holding brakes which are integrated in the swing gearboxes. The superstructure holding brakes lock the superstructure with respect to the undercarriage.

The hydraulic shovel is equipped with 4 travelling gear brakes which are integrated in the travel drives.

The gearbox brakes are holding brakes.

Do not press the button unless the superstructure is stationary. Do not use this button while the superstructure is still in motion. Risk of damage to the brakes and the swing gears.

Apply the holding brake:  when the hydraulic shovel is parked,

The travelling gear brakes are parking brakes relieving the hydrostatic drives when the hydraulic shovel is working and protecting the hydraulic shovel from rolling forwards or backwards.

The brakes are operated by means of the travel pedals (113 and 112, Fig. 2-117:). In neutral position of the travel pedals the brakes are applied and the hydraulic shovel is locked. During travelling, the brakes are released automatically.

 when travelling longer distances.  To apply the holding brakes, press switch (61, Fig. 2-116:).

Fig. 2-117:

The travelling gear brakes can also be applied with switch (63, Fig. 2-116:).

Fig. 2-116:

Actuate this switch only when the hydraulic shovel is stationary. Do not use this switch while the hydraulic shovel is still in motion. Risk of damage to the brakes and the travel gearboxes.

Switch (63) not actuated: The parking brake is applied automatically ca. 5 secs after the hydraulic shovel has stopped moving.

The parking brake is released automatically when the "Travel" function is activated.

Press the switch face with the symbol (63): The parking brake is applied permanently. The hydraulic shovel cannot be moved.

2-84

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE Transport - Safety instructions The machine must be loaded and transported only after all safety regulations have been observed and complied with.

Entrust loading and transporting of the machine to a company experienced in the transport of heavy equipment.

The responsability for loading and transporting lies with the transport company or their representative.

Remove oil, grease, soil, mud, snow, ice and other materials from the hydraulic shovel's crawler tracks and from ramps and loading platforms of the transport vehicle to minimize slipping.

Transport The dimensions and the service weight of the fully assembled hydraulic shovel do not allow the hydraulic shovel to be transported in an undismantled state on a low-bed trailer over public roads.

Therefore, the following components and modules must be dismantled beforehand.

Suspensions points as well as the center of gravity are marked on the modules (see example, Fig. 2-118:).

Dimensions and weights of the machines modules can be found in the annex, chapter “Technical Data” as well as in the “Technical Handbook”.

Secure the transport vehicle against rolling away.

Use only tying equipment of sufficient strength (the weights and dimensions of the hydraulic shovel are set out in the "Technical specifications").

Fig. 2-118:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-85

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation WORKING OPERATION - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read the sections "Fundamental safety instructions" and "Operation, safety instructions" carefully and observe the instructions given in them.

Do not exceed the maximum machine inclination (see “Maximum machine inclinations, information” chapter.

Inspect the site for underground gas, power and water lines before starting work. Any damage to such lines is a risk to life!

Clean off any earth, mud, snow, ice, grease and oil adhering to your working footwear before operating the machine. There is otherwise a risk of slipping off the pedals and initiating inadvertent movements.

Sound the horn to warn persons in the immediate vicinity before starting work.

Stop work if anyone is in the hazard range of the machine. Make sure they have left the hazard range before resuming work.

Never operate the machine unless it is standing on a reasonably horizontal, flat surface. The stability of the machine is otherwise at risk.

Ensure that the attachment has adequate clearance below overhead power lines and structures.

Trenches and working faces may give way. Keep well clear of them.

Do not operate the machine, 

when several track rollers or support rollers have been removed;



when one or several swing gearboxes have failed or been removed;



when one or several teeth on the backhoe or on the shovel are worn or missing;



when parts of the hardfacing layer on the backhoe or on the shovel are worn or missing.

Running-in instructions for hydraulic cylinders Compression of an oil/air compound in a hydraulic cylinder may result in detonations which might damage pistons and sealing rings.

Prior to initial commissioning and/or after repairs, run in the hydraulic cylinders as follows:  Start up the engines and run at low speed.

The pressure-limiting valve in the hydraulic system must not respond  In the first two working cycles, retract and extend the pistons of the hydraulic cylinders to max. ½ to ¾ (not to the limit stop).

Never change direction suddenly. The waiting time between changes of direction must be at least 4 seconds.  In the next eight working cycles, retract and extend the pistons of the hydraulic cylinders to the limit stop. The waiting time between changes of direction must be at least 4 seconds.  When all hydraulic cylinders have been run in, the hydraulic shovel can operate at a higher engine speed.

Warming up the hydraulic system At low temperatures, bring the engines down to moderate speed, then activate all hydraulic functions for about 10 minutes (bring to service temperature). For further instructions, see section "Lubricants".

If the BCS indicates problems with the cooling liquid temperature, engine oil pressure, coolant level, alternator or hydraulic oil filter control (with hydraulic oil at service temperature) light up:  Lower the working equipment and shut off engines.

Working under these circumstances results in heavy wear and possibly in severe damage and thus in high repair costs.

Such circumstances are considered by Bucyrus HEX as "abusive utilization".

Bucyrus HEX refuses to assume the guarantee for damage and consequential damage caused by an abusive utilization of the machine.

2-86

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Avoid extreme positions of the attachment Parts of the attachment may damage the machine if they are moved into extreme positions (see illustrations Fig. 2-119 - Fig. 2-120).

Work carefully, avoiding extreme positions of this kind.

Fig. 2-119

Fig. 2-120

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-87

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation WORKING OPERATION Before starting work Prior to initial commissioning and after repairs on the central lubricating system or the hydraulic cylinders, move the unloaded equipment for abt.

5 minutes.

This is required to ensure an adequate supply of grease to the cylinder bearings when the work starts.

Warming up: At low outside temperatures it is necessary to run the hydraulic system up to operating temperature.

The temperatures at which warming up is necessary depend on the type of hydraulic oil used; see also "Oils for hydraulic systems".

Activating the electronic excavator control The excavator can execute working movements only after the electronic excavator control (servocontrol) has been activated.

The servo-control block is enabled by switch (71, Fig. 2-121:).

At the beginning of the work, the electronic excavator control (servo-control) is activated by a contact in the driver's seat (105):  Electronic excavator control ON The driver is sitting on his seat.  Elektronic excavator control is OFF The driver's seat is empty.

 Run the diesel engines at ca. 2/3 full speed and start to perform no-load working movements for abt. 10 minutes with the hydraulic shovel.

Fig. 2-121:

2-88

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Swinging the superstructure Swinging of the superstructure is only possible when the superstructure holding brake is released and when the hydraulic shovel driver is sitting on his seat.  To swing the superstructure to the right control lever to the right (115, Fig. 2-122:).  To swing the superstructure to the left control lever to the left (115).

After releasing, the control lever returns automatically to position "0".

Releasing the control lever (115) is not sufficient to brake the superstructure automatically. In order to brake the superstructure, the control lever must be moved in the direction opposite the swinging movement (reversing).

Braking the superstructure The superstructure can only be braked by moving control lever (115) in the direction opposite the swinging movement (reversing).

Fig. 2-122:

The superstructure does not stop automatically by simply releasing the swing control lever (115).

To brake the superstructure, the swing control lever (115) must be moved in opposite direction.

In an emergency, activate the holding brake by pressing switch (61, Fig. 2-123:).

Fig. 2-123:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-89

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Working When released, all control levers for working operation return automatically to position "0".

Level a surface only in the bucket's digging direction. Never "beat" or "sweep" with the bucket.

Do not level off a surface with the front shell of the bucket open.

Close bucket completely before beginning to dig.

Sound the horn to warn persons in the immediate vicinity before starting work.

Do not exceed the maximum machine inclination (see “Maximum machine inclinations, information” chapter).

Fig. 2-124:

Extending and retracting the bucket or backhoe bucket stick  To extend the stick: push control lever (115, Fig. 2-124:) forwards.  To retract the stick: pull control lever (115) backwards.  To retract the stick with pressure: (only on bottom-dump bucket equipment) depress button (102) and push control lever (115) backwards.

Opening and closing the bottom-dump bucket  To open the bucket: press pedal (111, Fig. 2-124:) forwards or press button (117) to the left.  To close the bucket: press pedal (111) backwards or press button (117) to the right.

Fig. 2-125:

Raising and lowering the boom

Filling and emptying the bucket or the backhoe

 To raise the boom: pull control lever (116, Fig. 2-125:) backwards.

 To fill/tip back the bucket: shift control lever (116, Fig. 2-125:) to the left.

 To lower the boom: push control lever (116) forwards.

 To empty the bucket by dumping/tipping: shift control lever (116) to the right.

 To lower the boom with pressure: depress button (103) and push control lever (116) forwards.

2-90

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Emergency lowering of the equipment In case of a failing out of the electronic hydraulic shovel control and / or the engines lower the equipment as follows:  Sit down on the driver’s seat.  Switch on the electric system with switch (32, Fig. 2-126:),  Operate switch (71),  Push control lever (116) forwards to lower the working equipment to ground.  Contact the responsible service personnel as soon as possible.

Fig. 2-126:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-91

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation After daily operation Parking the machine  Park the machine on level and stable ground. This is particularly important in winter to avoid freezing of the tracks.

 Inspect the engines, the hydraulic system, the track rollers, support rollers, idlers and gearboxes visually for leaks.

Escaping oil pollutes the environment.

 Stand the working equipment on the ground.  Shut off the engines.  Shift both control levers into all directions todepressurize the hydraulic cylinders.  Withdraw the key from the electrical system key-switch.  Close the cab window.  Lock the cab door and all lockable hatches and covers on the machine.  Clean the machine of coarse dirt as well as of combustible and easily flammable substances, if possible with a stream jet (rubber parts and electric components with compressed air - refer to information label) Otherwise, the fire and explosion hazard will exist.

Repair leaks immediately (or have them repaired).Report oil accidents to the user of the machine.  Check the superstructure, undercarriage and the working equipment for damage and all steel components for cracks or fractures.  Report detected damage immediately to the user.  Clean off gross dirt, ice and snow from the fins and the fan wheel of the hydraulic oil cooler.

 Fill up the fuel tanks.

2-92

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation ASSEMBLING WORKING EQUIPMENT - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Personel Assembly work may be carried out only by operating or maintenance personnel who have the necessary know-how at their disposal.

If such know-how is lacking, meticulous instruction must be given by experienced personnel, e.g. from Bucyrus HEX. The operating manual, and in particular the section headed "Fundamental Safety Instructions", must have been read and understood.

Only such persons may start up the machine during assembly work in order to adjust the attachments.

Incorrect operation of the machine or the attachments may give rise to life-threatening situations.

Personal protective gear and working clothes Wear closely fitting working clothing when working on the machine. Loose, wide garments may catch on machine parts and result in injury.

Wear a safety helmet, safety footwear and gloves.

Tools and auxiliaries Tools, hoists, slings, trestles and other devices must be in a reliable, safe state.

Metal splinters may cause injury when accessory bolts are being driven in or out. A brass or copper mandrel should therefore be used for this purpose, and goggles must be worn.

Use only the steps, platforms and handrails when climbing onto or off the machine.

Always keep steps and platforms in a non-slip state. Remove any oil, grease, earth, clay, snow, ice and other foreign matter immediately.

Securing the working equipment Stand working equipment on the ground in such a way that no movements can be made if mechanical or hydraulic connections become detached.

Secure any equipment or component which is to be mounted or dismantled, or whose position is to be changed, with hoists or appropriate slinging/supporting devices to prevent them from moving, slipping or falling inadvertently.

Securing the machine Carry out work on the attachment only if the machine is secured as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Selecting the attachments The machine can be equipped with various attachments. The components of the attachments are assembled with hydraulic cylinders and connectors. Components can be combined in various ways for optimum adaptation of the attachments to the specific application.

Operate the machine only with the equipment and component combinations expressly approved by Bucyrus HEX for this type of machine.

Never install and commission other equipment and component combinations without Bucyrus HEX first having inspected and approved the project in writing.

Protective roof against falling objects The machine is equipped with an integrated cabprotection roof (FOPS).

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-93

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation Securing the machine Risk of injury The machine must not be started by unauthorized persons.

Secure the machine as described below: 

before carrying out any fitting and modification work on the working equipment,



before carrying out any servicing and repair work on the machine.

Therefore, secure the machine.

Observe the accident prevention regulations.

 Park the machine on level and stable ground.

Depressurize pipeline systems, on which work is to be carried out, by appropriate measures.

 Stand the working equipment on the ground.

Protective shrouds of moving machine parts may only be opened or removed when the drive unit is stationary and protected against inadvertent starting.

 Depressurize the hydraulic system.

 Shut off the engines.  Withdraw the key from the key-switch.

Before carrying out fitting works, the machine and the equipment must be protected against inadvertent starting by placing chocks under the tracks and by standing the working equipment on the ground.

Hydraulic and lubricating systems: Close all open bores, pipe and hose connections with pressureresistant plugs.

Refill collected hydraulic oil back into the hydraulic system only through the return-flow filters. Dispose of non re-usable oils without polluting the environment.

All components of Bucyrus HEX machines have been carefully purpose-coordinated. Trouble-free operation and a long service life can only be achieved with original Bucyrus HEX spare parts.

Respect the sequence of working operations when fitting or replacing the attachments. The sequence has been determined and tested by qualified experts.

2-94

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation CORROSION PROTECTION FOR PINS AND BEARINGS (BUSHINGS AND HUBS) Use “GLEITMO 815” anti-corrosive agent only.

Other agents are not approved by Bucyrus HEX. All pins and bearings (bushings and hubs) of the working equipment or in equipment componenents must be treated “GLEITMO 815” anti-corrosive agent before fitting.

“GLEITMO 815” 

permits easy fitting and dismantling,



protects against rust, oxidation and similar wear,



prevents seizing and fretting corrosion in nonmoving parts of bearings.

This is achieved by aluminium and copper particles forming a protective layer on the metal. This layer removes surface irregularities and does not sweat, seize or harden.

Application of "GLEITMO 815"  Clean off grease, oil, dirt and corrosion protection agents from pins and bearings using white spirit or diesel fuel.

Rust patches must be thoroughly removed, if any.

All parts must present a dry, bright metal surface.  Apply a thin layer of "GLEITMO 815" on pins and all bearings using a brush or a spray can.

Pin shafts and bearings must be completely co-vered by the protective layer.

If the protective layer of a pin already treated with "GLEITMO 815" is damaged, these areas must be touched up before fitting the part.  Fitting and securing of pins.

If the pin is too heavy to be fitted manually, apply "GLEITMO 815" at first only on abt. a quarter of the pin's length.

Then position pin by means of a lifting gearready for fitting.

Apply "GLEITMO 815" on the remaining length of pin shaft, fit pin and secure.

“GLEITMO 815” is available from Bucyrus HEX Spare-Parts-Service, part-no. 2764305.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-95

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation ON-BOARD CRANE (OPTIONAL) The on-board crane is designed for lifting heavy parts only.

On-board crane, monitoring, warning and control elements (Fig. 2-127:)

Do not lift persons.

Observe all national directives as well as specific regulations relevant to crane operation.

Personel Crane work may be carried out only by operators who have the necessary know-how and the permission to operate cranes.

If such know-how or such permission is lacking, meticulous instruction must be given by experienced personnel, e.g. from Bucyrus HEX. Incorrect operation of the crane may give rise to life-threatening situations.

Fig. 2-127:

Pos. Element 1 Monitoring lamp 2 Warning lamp 3 Warning lamp 4 Monitoring lamp 5 Key-switch

10 11 12

Button Monitoring lamp Knob Monitoring lamp Warning lamp Button Button

21

Control lever

22 23 24

Control lever Control lever Control lever

6 7 8 9

2-96

Function Alternator Engine oil pressure Engine temperature Air filter Electrical system ON/OFF Start engine of drive unit Preheating system (option) Engine speed variation Crane in operation Malfunction EMERGENCY STOP Emergency lowering of winch Extending and retracting of boom extension Folding the boom Swinging the boom Winch up / down

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation On-board crane, putting into operation Risk of serious injuries due to movements of the crane.

Put the crane into operation only after all persons have left the danger area.

Do not exceed the maximum lifting capacity (observe the lift capacity chart attached to the boom).

On-board crane, drive unit The drive unit (Fig. 2-128:) supplies the crane with hydraulic power. So the on-board crane is functional without the shovel’s engines running.

The drive unit comprises the diesel engine, fuel tank, starter batteries and the hydraulic system.

The drive unit is equipped with an Emergency OFF push switch (arrow, Fig. 2-128:).

In case of emergency push switch, the engine of the drive unit comes to standstill.

Prior to each deployment: Carry out all maintenance work as listed in the “Inspection and Servicing Plans “T” and “W”.

To start the drive unit:  Turn key-switch (5, Fig. 2-127:) to position ON.  Press button (6), engine will start.

The crane control unit is equipped with an Emergency OFF push switch (11).

In case of emergency push switch, the engine of the drive unit comes to standstill.

After finishing work block the boom, then stop the engine (see chapter “On-board crane, - blocking the boom in position of rest”).

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Fig. 2-128:

2-97

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation On-Board crane, – blocking the boom in position of rest Movements and accelerations produced by working operations of the machine can cause damage to the swing drive of the on-board crane, if the crane is not blocked.

The hydraulic on-board crane must therefore be blocked in its position of rest.

Risk of serious injuries due to movements of the crane.

Put the crane into operation only after all persons have left the danger area.

To block the boom:  Retract the boom completely.  Swing the boom in the direction of the blocking device (Fig. 2-129:) and lower it.  Withdraw the cotter pin at the tip of the boom.  Extend the boom carefully until the tip engages the blocking device (arrow, Fig. 2-129:).  Reinsert and lock the the cotter pin.

On-board crane, checking Extract from the inspection and testing regulations The on-board crane is approved in accordance with the Accident Prevention Regulations for Cranes (BGV D6, applicable only in Germany).

The on-board crane must be inspected regularly in accordance with the regulations in force in the country of use.

The inspections must be requested by the user of the crane. The expert or specialist entrusted with the inspection can be appointed at the user's discretion.

The user must ensure, however, that the appointed person meets the requirements.

The user is obliged to make available all documents required for the inspection and to ensure the smooth running of the inspection. He is furthermore obliged to provide, if required, crane operators and auxiliary personnel and the required test loads.

The result of the inspection is to be documented in an inspection record signed by the inspector.

The inspection record serves as proof on the part of the user that the inspections have been carried out. The inspection record must contain all data required for crane identification and for the performance of further regular inspections.

Fig. 2-129:

2-98

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-99

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation NOTES ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................

2-100

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Operation

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2-101

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING

Operating instructions

Part 1 INTRODUCTION FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Part 2 OPERATION

Target group

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel Operating personnel The operating personnel must have knowhow relevant to the operation and the application of this or comparable machines.

Part 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING

Inspection and servicing personnel

Part 4 REPAIR WORK

Repair personnel

The inspection and servicing personnel must have know-how relevant to the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

The repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to the repair of this or comparable machines.

Part 5 ANNEX

Part 6 INDEX

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

3-1

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing

3-2

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing INSPECTION AND SERVICING SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Operating manual No inspection and servicing work must be carried out until the operating manual has been read and understood.

Pay special attention to: „Fundamental safety instructions" and all warnings and safety instructions attached to the machine.

Securing the machine Carry out servicing work only if the machine is secured as described in the section "Securing the machine".

Climbing onto and off the machine Use only the ladders, steps, platforms and handrails provided when climbing onto or off the machine.

The operating manual lists all jobs to be done. The descriptions of job sequences, however, provide only

Always keep ladders, steps, platforms and handrails in a non-slip, safe state and remove any oil, grease, soil, clay, snow, ice and other foreign matter immediately.

Experienced personnel with the necessary instructions.

Always face the machine when climbing on and off.

The operating manual must be kept with the machine at all times.

Inspection and servicing personnel Inspection and servicing personnel must have the necessary know-how on the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

The necessary know-how can be acquired in a several day's instruction, e.g. by an Bucyrus HEX mechanic or by attending an Bucyrus HEX training course.

Personal protective equipment and working clothing Wear closely fitting working clothing when working on the machine. Loose, wide garments may catch on machine parts and result in injury.

Wear a safety helmet, safety footwear, gloves and, in the event of high noise levels, ear protectors.

Securing the working equipment Stand working equipment on the ground in such a way that no movements can be made if mechanical or hydraulical connections become detached.

Secure any equipment or component which is to be mounted or dismantled, or whose position is to be changed, with hoists or appropriate slinging / supporting devices to prevent them from moving, slipping or falling inadvertently.

Checking the state of tools Use only fully functional, reliable tools.

Select the right tool for the job.

Wrenches of the wrong size, for example, may slip and cause injury.

Cleaning jobs Prior to commencing work, clean your working area, if necessary and possible, with a stream jet (rubber parts and electric components with compressed air - refer to information label).

Exhaust pipes and turbo chargers in the engine compartments are covered with special heatinsulating material. This material must not be spraywashed with steam-jet cleaners or highpressure cleaners. It will be damaged. Therefore cover all the insulating material with plastic foils before using steam-jet cleaners or high-pressure cleaners inside the engine compartments.

Use only lint-free cleaning rags when working on the hydraulic system or the engines.

Cleaning agents and solvents may give off harmful, readily flammable vapours. Never work with such agents except on well ventilated premises; never inhale the vapours and never smoke.

Prevent solvents and cleaning agents from coming into contact with your skin.

Wear gloves.

Observe the instructions on the packaging.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-3

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Handling flammable liquids

Visisble oil losses

When handling flammable liquids:

Have any visible leakage repaired immediately.



never smoke,

Escaping oil is an environmental hazard.



keep away from unshielded light sources and naked flames,

Fuel and other consumables often have low flash points and are readily ignited. Never attempt to extinguish burning liquids with water.

Use: 

dry powder,



carbon dioxide or



foam extinguishers.

Water used for extinguishing purposes would vapourize instantaneously on contact with burning substances and spread burning oil, for example, over a wide area. Water generates short circuits in the electrical system, possibly producing hazards.

Soak up any oil that has escaped with a binding agent.

Sweep up binding agent and dispose of it separately from other waste.

Relieving residual pressure in the hydraulic system Only unpressurized hydraulic systems may be opened. Even when a machine is parked on a horizontal surface with ist attachments supported on the ground and its driving motors switched off, there may still be substantial residual pressure in parts of the hydraulic system, e.g. primary pressure from the last hydraulic movements prior to stopping the machine.

Notify the fire brigade.

Residual pressure is reduced only gradually. If an intervention into the hydraulic system is to be undertaken immediately after stopping, the system must be depressurzized:

Fastening and securing elements

(do not leave the driver's seat)

Check fastening and securing elements, e.g. bolts, nuts, washers, before using them again.

 Stand working equipment on the ground,

Replace any damaged parts.

 Shut off the engines,

Spare parts

 Move all control levers and pedals repeatedly into all ndirections.

Use only the original sparts parts of Bucyrus HEX. They are the only ones to fulfill the technical specifications of the machine.

Screwed connections, piping, hydraulic hoses

Handling oils and greases

Repair any leakage in the piping and hose system immediately.

Hot lubricant or hydraulic oil emerging uncontrolled from the system may result in severe burns.

A fine, highly pressurized jet of hydraulic oil can penetrate the skin.

Never set foot withing reach of the emerging oil jet.

Never search for leakages with the fingers, but use a piece of cardboard and always wear goggles.

Avoid contact with the skin. Wear gloves and firm protective clothing.

Used oil may be harmful to the skin.

Clean soiled skin thoroughly with warm soapy water and apply a barrier cream. Never use fuels or solvents for cleaning the skin.

If you have swallowed any oil, avoid vomiting but consult a doctor immediately.

If oil has penetrated into the skin, consult a doctor immediately.

Never repair damaged piping; always replace them.

Replace hydraulic hoses immediately on detecting any damage or moist areas.

Tighten leaking screw plugs only when the system is depressurized.

Escaping oil is an environmental hazard.

3-4

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Non-polluting disposal Dispose of oils, greases, cooling liquids, detergents, solvents and oil-containing components, such as filters, cleaning rags, replaced wearing parts and unusable machine parts, without polluting the environment and separately from other waste.

Do not dispose of these substances together with household wastes.

Fill these substances into the containers provided for such purposes.

Like any other oil, also bio-degradable, "environmental-friendly" hydraulic oil must be disposed of separately.

Do not allow oils and oily wastes to penetrate into the soil or into water. They are an environmental hazard.

Engine exhaust gases Start and operate combustion engines only on well-ventilated premises.

In closed rooms, exhaust gases must be evacuated to the outside; Do not work on the exhaust system an do not make any modifications to it;.

Exhaust gases from diesel engines and some of their constituents may cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm.

Handling batteries Battery Posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling.

Used pressure vessels for cold-starting fluid (ether) must be disposed of properly. Contact the supplier with regard to disposal / return of the vessels.

Batteries give off explosive gases.

Even apparently empty pressure vessels can contain rests of ether and therefore explode if they are damaged or heated up above 49°C / 120°F. They must therefore be handled in the same way as full pressure vessels.

Avoid any contact with the skin, mouth, eyes and clothing. Avoid spilling battery acid or inhaling the vapours.

Never handle batteries close to naked flames and unshielded light sources, never smoke.

Battery acid is toxic and corrosive.

Wear gloves, firm protective clothing and goggles / face protection shield when handling batteries.



Do not keep them on the machine.



Do not damage or open the vessels.

If the skin is splashed with acid, rinse thoroughly with running water and consult a doctor.



Do not expose the vessels to great heat or direct sunlight.

If the eyes are splashed with acid, rinse thoroughly with running water and consult a doctor immediately.



Do not dispose of in fire.



Keep the vessels in a place inaccessible to unauthorized persons.

Never set tools down on the battery. They may induce a short circuit, causing irreparable damage to the battery and injuring persons.



Dispose of the vessels properly.

Seals After replacing parts or after opening housings replace seals. Always use new seals and gaskets.

Clean sealing faces prior to assembly.

Individual spares may contain asbestos. Such spares or their packaging are marked with: Never process spares containing asbestos mechanically. Inhaling asbestos dust is a health hazard.

Clean sealing faces prior to assembly.

Never wear metal necklaces, bracelets or watchstraps when working on the battery. The metal parts may induce a short-circuit resulting in burns.

Dispose of used batteries separately from other waste in the interests of environmental protection.

Before working on the electrical system Before performing work on the electrical system where tools, spare parts, etc. can come into contact with electrical conductors or contacts, the battery must be disconnected.

Disconnect first the negative and then the positive terminal.

After the work: Reconnect first the positive and then the negative terminal.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-5

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Handling of cold-starting fluid (ether)

Filters

The engine compartment can be equipped with pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether).

Replace / clean all filter elements or filter cartridges within the specified periods.

Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

Protect the pressure vessels against damage before beginning to work in or close to the engine compartment.

Read and observe the instructions on the pressure vessels.

For further details please refer to the instructions and safety data-sheets of the manufacturer / supplier of pressure vessels with cold starting fluid (ether).

Provide for sufficient ventilation.

Do not eat, drink or smoke when replacing an empty vessel.

Do not inhale the vapours of escaping cold-starting fluid.

In contact with the skin, ether can cause frostbites and irritations. Avoid skin contact.

All filters are coordinated carefully with the equipment. Original Bucyrus HEX parts must be used to ensure smooth running and a long service life of the engine and the hydraulic units.

Sealing elements When dismantling parts, watch for sealing elements.

Check sealing elements prior to installation and replace any that are even slightly damaged.

When assembling, ensure a perfect fit.

Oil-level check and oil change Position the machine horizontally.

Change the oil when the machine is at operating temperature. Warm oil flows better and carries suspended particles (carbon or abraded matter) better.

Wear suitable protective gloves and goggles.

Even apparently empty pressure vessels can still contain rests of ether and therefore explode if they are damaged or heated up above 49°C. They must therefore be handled in the same way as full pressure vessels. 

Do not keep them on the machine.



Do not damage or open the vessels.



Do not expose the vessels to great heat or direct sunlight.



Do not dispose of in fire.



Keep the vessels in a place inaccessible to unauthorized persons.



Lubricating Clean the lubricating nipple, then lubricate as scheduled.

After servicing To prevent corrosion, coat all bright metal parts with a grease film.

On completing work, re-install all protective devices.

Never start up the drive motors while work is being done on the machine.

Carry out performance tests with the machine.

Dispose of the vessels properly.

Selecting oils and greases Use the recommended qualities only, matching viscosities with the temperature level.

3-6

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing INSPECTION AND SERVICING WORK, FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD Safety instructions Prior to commencing work, obtain informationon the national and corporate rules for the prevention of accidents and avoiding fires.

Pay particular attention to hazards caused by combustible and easily flammable substances.

Obtain information on the safe handling of the fire extinguishers to be used.

Avoid smoking and open fire on, next to and below the hydraulic shovel.

Place suitable fire guardings (fire barriers) if open fire or flying sparks cannot be avoided during repair work.

If necessary, also cover the ground with fireprotective blankets.

Apply special protection to cables, cable ducts as well as to hose and pipe lines.

Have all your welding, flame cutting and grinding work approved before starting work.

The engine compartment can be equipped with pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether). Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

Protect the pressure vessels against damage before beginning to work in or close to the engine compartment.

Ensure sufficient ventilation.

Even battery gases can ignite in open flames or fire.

Do not keep any fire extinguishers that are not suitable or have not been tested.

Combustible and easily or highly inflammable substances or liquids increase the risk of fire and explosion. This is also valid for pressure vessels containing flammable substances as, for instance, spray oil or cold-starting fluid (ether). They are heat-sensitive and can explode even if exposed only to intensive sunlight.

Do not extinguish flammable liquids with water.

Use:

These substance can also ignite themselves if they come close to hot units or objects as, for instance, a turbocharger.

Do not store these substances on the hydraulic shovel. If combustible, easily or highly flammable substances or liquids were used during maintenance operations, they must be completely removed from the hydraulic shovel at the end of the work.



dry-powder, carbon-dioxide or foam extinguishing compounds.

When getting into contact with burning substances, the fire-fighting water would abruptly evaporate and distribute the substance such as oil over a wide area. Water causes short-circuits in the electrical system thus possibly entailing new hazards.

Call the fire brigade.

Clean the hydraulic shovel carefully after the maintenance, if oil, grease, fuel, detergents or coldstarting fluid have been spilt over the machine. If possible, use a steam-jet cleaner for cleaning.

Avoid parking the hydraulic shovel in places where 

combustible substances such as coal dust or tar are present.



open or smouldering fire may occur.

Remove the hydraulic shovel from such an area where combustible or easily flammable liquids have spilled from the hydraulic shovel onto the ground.

Flying sparks (caused by welding, flame cutting, grinding, electrical short-circuit) may cause fire on the ground that can spread to the hydraulic shovel.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-7

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing

3-8

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing INSPECTION AND SERVICING PLANS - INSTRUCTIONS Intervals The inspection and Servicing plan lists all jobs which have to be done on the machine at regular intervals.

The individual inspection and Servicing plans are marked with letters providing a link between the operating hours (OH) recorded by the hours-run meter of the machine and the inspection and sServicing plans.

Plan V N

Do all jobs .... ...once prior to initial commissioning. ...after initial commissioning and during the running-in period (up to 100 OH). ...every 10 OH or every working shift 1) T ...every 60 OH or weekly . 2 W ...after every 250 OH. A ...after every 500 OH. B ...after every 1000 OH. C ...after every 5000 OH. D ...after every 10000 OH. E OH = Bh = Operating hours

Air-intake system The air filter must be serviced only if the BCS so indicates. Replace the filter elements after one year at the latest.

Oils / Greases For the specification of oils and greases to be used refer to the „LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES“ section.

The numerals mentioned in the "Oil / Grease" column in the inspection and Servicing plans have the following meaning: Oils for combustion engines and comI pressors Oils for hydraulic systems II IIIa, b, c Oils for gearboxes Greases for bearings and swing rings V

Cleaning jobs Cleaning jobs, especially on cooling systems, must be done at shorter intervals if the machine is exposed to severe dust build-up.

Components Change of engine oil The intervals stated for changing the engine oil apply to fuels with a sulphur content of ≤ 0.5% and a permanent ambient temperature down to –10° C (14 °F).

In case of higher sulphur content and/or a permanent ambient temperature of below –10° C (14 °F), shorter intervals are required.

The maintenance intervals for components, e.g. engine and gearbox, are listed in the following Bucyrus HEX maintenance schedules.

It is possible that the manufacturer's documentation for these components states intervals deviating from the above-mentioned intervals.

In such case, only the maintenance intervals specified by Bucyrus HEX shall apply.

If the engine oil change intervals are not reached within 6 months, the oil must be changed at least after 6 months.

2

Whichever comes first.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-9

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing

3-10

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Plan V Plan V - Once prior to initial commissioning Page 1 of 2 Location

Servicing work

Engine Engine oil reservoir Cooling system Cooling liquid level Electrical system Battery

Check oil level Check oil level

Lighting Monitoring, warning and control elements

BCS Hydraulic system

Hydraulic oil reservoir Hydraulic cylinders Pump tranfer gearbox - Pre-chambers - Expansion reservoir Swing gearbox Travel gearbox - Pre-chambers - Brake chambers Swing ring Internal gearing Undercarriage Track roller Support roller Track tensioner Idler

3

Quantity/ No. 2 2

Check

2

Check liquid level (not applicable when maintenance-free batteries build in) Check operation Check function of monitoring, warning and control elements Check emergency OFF function Check function Check function of working and travelling movement Check pressure (see Technical Handbook) Check oil level Vent (see chapter “Venting hydraulic system“) Check oil level

8

Check oil level Check oil level Check oil level Check oil level Check oil level Check grease filling Check for leaks and free movement Check grease filling, fill with grease 3 Check for leaks and free movement Check grease filling, fill with grease 3 Check pressure (see Technical Handbook) Check for leaks and free movement

1 2 2 6 2 2x2 2x2 1 2x7 2x2 2 2

Machines with undercarriage greasing system

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-11

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Plan V – once prior to initial commissioning Page 2 of 2 Location Central lubricating system Grease container Greasing and pause cycles Level control Service – Station (tanklift) - Arm bearing grease nipple - Hydr. cylinder bearing grease nipple Air conditioner (optional) Compressor Hydraulic ladder - Safety shut-off On-board crane (optional) - Fastening bolts - Bearings - Joint (column / boom) - Cylinder bearing - Swing ring Hydraulic oil reservoir Crane drive engine

- Battery Escape ladder near driver’s cab - Locking device - Ladder Emergency escape device / seat (optional) - Harness holding device on cab roof All lines, fittings and connections All articutated joints and hinges

3-12

Servicing work

Quantity/ No.

Check filling level Check setting Check function Check operation Lubricate Lubricate

1

1 1 2

Check oil level Lubricate Check and readjust, if necessary

1 1

Check for tightness Lubricate Lubricate Lubricate Grease Check oil level (see “On-Board Crane“ operating instructions) Check oil level (see “Crane drive Engine“ operating instructions) Check liquid level Check function Check function Check free movement Check completeness and condition Check for tightness Inspect visually for leaks, wearing marks Grease

16 4 2 5 1 1 1

2

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Plan N Plan N – After initial commissioning and during the running-in period (up to 100 OH) Page 1 of 2 Location Engine (after 100 Bh) - Bearing - Fastening bolts Cooling system Water filter Radiator - Bearing - Fastening bolts Hydraulic system Oil cooler - Bearing - Fastening bolts Return-flow filter Magnetic rod Filter housing (cooling system) - Return flow filter - Magnetic rod Pressure accumulator – emergency lowering Pressure accumulator – hydraulic ladder Pressure accumulator – track tensioner Pump transfer gearbox - Pre-chambers - Fastening bolts Swing gearbox - Fastening bolts Travel gearbox - Pre-chambers - Brake chambers - Fastening bolts

4

Servicing work

Quantity/ No.

Check for tightness Replace

2x2

Check for tightness

Check for tightness Replace Clean Replace clean Check function Check function Check function Change oil Change oil Check for tightness Change oil Check for tightness Change oil Change oil Change oil Check for tightness

2x7 2 3 1 1 2 2x2 24 2x94 64 2 2x2 2x2

see “Refilling quantities – Oil“ table

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-13

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Plan N – After initial commissioning and during the running-in period (up to 100 OH) Page 2 of 2 Location Swing ring Fastening bolts (swing ring, undercarriage and superstructure) Superstructure Fastening bolts, especially at superstructure / pedestal / driver´s cab All lines, fittings and connections

3-14

Servicing work

Quantity/ No.

Check for tightness (see Technical handbook)

Check for tightness Inspect visually for leaks, wearing marks

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Plan T and W Plan T - (Every 10 OH or every working shift (whichever comes first) Plan W - Every 60 OH or every working shift (whichever comes first) Page 1 of 2 Location

Servicing work Check oil level

Quantity/ No. 2

Plan T 

Plan W 

Engine Engine oil reservoir

Check oil level

2





Cooling system Cooling fluid

Check level

2





Radiator

Check / clean

2





Fuel system Fuel filter Fuel cooling system Fuel tanks Air-intake system Intake and clean-air lines

Drain off water Check / clean Drain off water and sediment Check BCS - indication

2x3 2 2



   





Check for tightness and leaks

Electrical system Lighting

Check operation







 













Switchgear cabinet - Breather filter - Dust trap - EMERGENCY OFF button

Remove dust Check function

Monitoring, warning and control elements BCS

Check function of monitoring, warning and control elements Check function

Hydraulic system

Check function of working and travelling movement Inspect visually for leaks

1 6

1



Hydraulic oil reservoir Oil cooler

Check oil level Check / clean

1 2



 

Fan wheel

Check condition

2





Pump transfer gearbox - Pre-chambers

Check oil level

2

- Expansion reservoir

Check oil level

2

Oil filter (tell-tale)

Check

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

2x1

 

 

3-15

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Plan T - (Every 10 OH or every working shift (whichever comes first) Plan W - Every 60 OH or every working shift (whichever comes first) Page 2 of 2 Location

Servicing work Check oil level

Quantity/ No. 6

Plan T 

Plan W 

Swing gearbox Travel gearbox

Check for leaks

2





Service-station (tanklift)

Inspect visually for leaks and damages





Undercarriage Tracks

Inspect track tension visually





Track roller

Check for leaks and free movement

2x7



Support roller

Check for leaks and free movement

2x2



Idler

Check for leaks and free movement

2



Check filling level Check visually

1

(see “Air Conditioning manual)

1

Check for tightness Check oil level (see “Crane drive Engine“ operating instructions) Check oil level Check

16 1

Check condition Check control module

2 1

Central lubricating system Grease container Lubricating points Air conditioner On-board crane 5 Fastening bolts Crane drive engine

Hydraulic oil reservoir - Reflow filter (contamination indicator) Fire extinguisher Automatic fire-extinguishing system (optional) Escape ladder near driver’s cab - Locking device - Ladder Emergency escape device / seat (optional) - Harness holding device on cab roof All lines, fittings and connections Hydraulic shovel Driver’s cab - Window panes

2







  

1 1  

 

Check function Check function Check for free movement Check completeness and condition

   

   

Check for tightness





Inspect visually for leaks, wearing marks Overall cleaning





Clean



 

5 before each deployment

3-16

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Plan A – E Plan A - after every 250 OH (at 250, 750, 1250 ... OH)

Plan B - after every 500 OH (at 500, 1500, 2500 ... OH)

Plan C - after every 1000 OH (at 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 ... OH)

Plan D - after every 5000 OH (at 5000, 15000, 25000 ... OH)

Plan E - after every 10000 OH (at 10000, 20000, 30000, ... OH)

Page 1 of 7 Location Servicing in acc. with W or T Monitoring, warning and control elements - Joystick - Control spool - Pedal - Control spool (machine with loading shovel) - Control spool (machine with backhoe bucket)

6

Servicing work

No. of

Plan Plan Plan Plan Plan A B C D E     

grease lightly

2x46







grease lightly

3x26







grease lightly

2x26







apply a thin layer of low temperature grease

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-17

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing

Plan A - after every 250 OH (at 250, 750, 1250 ... OH)

Plan B - after every 500 OH (at 500, 1500, 2500 ... OH)

Plan C - after every 1000 OH (at 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 ... OH)

Plan D - after every 5000 OH (at 5000, 15000, 25000 ... OH)

Plan E - after every 10000 OH (at 10000, 20000, 30000, ... OH) Page 2 of 7 Location

Servicing work

Engine

Carry out oil analysis Change oil

No. of 2 2

Plan Plan Plan Plan Plan A B C D E 





7









Clean







- Fastening bolts

Check tightness







- Rubber bearing

Check condition























- Bearing

Engine oil reservoir

Change oil

2

7

Clean - Oil filter

Replace

2x2

V-belt

Check tension











Check condition











Centrifuge

Clean

2x1







- Rotor seal

Replace

2x1







- Casing seal

Check /replace

2x1







Inspection and servicing

(see Operating and maintenance manual for engine)







7

2





see “Refilling quantities – Oil“ table

3-18

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing

Plan A - after every 250 OH (at 250, 750, 1250 ... OH)

Plan B - after every 500 OH (at 500, 1500, 2500 ... OH)

Plan C - after every 1000 OH (at 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 ... OH)

Plan D - after every 5000 OH (at 5000, 15000, 25000 ... OH)

Plan E - after every 10000 OH (at 10000, 20000, 30000, ... OH) Page 3 of 7 Location

Servicing work

No. of

Cooling system Water filter Radiator - Check tightness - Fastening bolts - Rubber bearing Cooling liquid

Inspect visually for leaks Replace

2x2

Anti-freeze Lines Hose clamps Fuel system Fuel filter Water trap Fuel tank, breather filter Fuel tank Air-intake system Main filter element Safety filter element Air-intake line and clean-air line Hoses Electrical system Battery cable connections Battery Switchgear cabinet - Breather filter - Filter element

Check tightness Check condition Check DCA4-concentration (see: Enginge Operating Instructions) Change Check Check for leaks Check tightness

Plan Plan Plan Plan Plan A B C D E          



  

  

  





  

  

   

 

 

  

  

   

  

  

  





18

Replace Clean Replace Clean

2x3 2x3 2x2 2

Check / replace Replace Check for tightness and leaks

2x69 2 x 6 10

Replace 

Check for tightness Check fluid level

8

Clean Replace

1 1

8

Cooling-liquid replacement after 2 years at the latest

9

Replacement of main filter element after one year resp. after 3 cleaning cycles.

 

 

 

 



 

 

 

10

Replacement of safety filter element after one year resp. after 3 cleaning cycles of the main filter element at the latest.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-19

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing

Plan A - after every 250 OH (at 250, 750, 1250 ... OH)

Plan B - after every 500 OH (at 500, 1500, 2500 ... OH)

Plan C - after every 1000 OH (at 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 ... OH)

Plan D - after every 5000 OH (at 5000, 15000, 25000 ... OH)

Plan E - after every 10000 OH (at 10000, 20000, 30000, ... OH) Page 4 of 7 Location

Servicing work

Plan C

Plan D

Plan E

Hydraulic system

Check pressure (see Technical handbook)







Check for tightness Check condition Replace Check / clean Replace Magnetic rod Check / clean Bypass valve (working circuit) Check / clean filter sieve Filter housing (cooling circuit) - Return-flow filter Replace - Bypass valve Check / clean filter sieve - Magnetic rod Check / clean Filter (pilot control circuit) Check for contamination and damage Replace Filter (control circuit) Check for contamination and damage Replace Filter (swing mechanism Check for contamination and pump feeding-circuit) damage Replace Filter (swing mechanism) Check for contamination and damage Replace Breather filter Replace Hydraulic oil reservoir Carry out oil analysis Change oil Pressure accumulators Check pressure (see Technical handbook) Cylinder (seals and guide Rplace rings)

   

      

Oil cooler - Bearing - Fastening bolts - Rubber bearing Return-flow filter High-pressure filter

11

No. of

Plan A

Plan B

2x7 2x4 2x4 2 2x4

 

      

3 3 1 2x1

   

   

   



 

 



 

 



 

 

 

  

    

2x1 1 1 2x1 2x1 6 6 2 1 1 11 12





see “Refilling quantities – Oil“ table

12

Unless it is regulary analyzed, the hydraulic oil must be changed every 5000 OH or after 3 years at the latest

3-20

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing

Plan A - after every 250 OH (at 250, 750, 1250 ... OH)

Plan B - after every 500 OH (at 500, 1500, 2500 ... OH)

Plan C - after every 1000 OH (at 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 ... OH)

Plan D - after every 5000 OH (at 5000, 15000, 25000 ... OH)

Plan E - after every 10000 OH (at 10000, 20000, 30000, ... OH) Page 5 of 7 Location

Servicing work

No. of

Pump transfer gearbox

Carry out oil analysis Change oil Clean Replace Change oil Clean Check for tightness Check for contamination and damage Replace Carry out oil analysis Change oil Replace Carry out oil analysis Check oil level Change oil Clean Check oil level Change oil Clean Check oil level Change oil Clean / replace Check grease filling Check condition Check for tightness (see Technical Handbook)

2 2 13 2x1 2x1 2 x 9 13 2x1

- Breather filter - Pre-chamber - Breather filter Fastening bolts Oil filter

Swing gearbox Breather filter Travel gearbox

- Magnetic plug Pre-chambers - Magnetic plug Brake chambers Breather filter Swing ring Gearing / pinion Fastening bolts (swing ring, undercarriage and superstructure)

13

2x1 2x1 6 6 13 6x1 2 2 2 13 2x4 2x1 2 x 1 13 2x1 2x2 2 x 2 13 2x3 1

Plan Plan Plan Plan Plan A B C D E                         



 

 

 



 



 

 

  

                

                

see “Refilling quantities – Oil“ table

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-21

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing

Plan A - after every 250 OH (at 250, 750, 1250 ... OH)

Plan B - after every 500 OH (at 500, 1500, 2500 ... OH)

Plan C - after every 1000 OH (at 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 ... OH)

Plan D - after every 5000 OH (at 5000, 15000, 25000 ... OH)

Plan E - after every 10000 OH (at 10000, 20000, 30000, ... OH)

Page 6 of 7 Location

Servicing work

No. of

Undercarriage

Check wear (see Technical Handbook) Check pressure (see Technical handbook) Replace

Plan Plan Plan Plan Plan A B C D E   

2x2



Diaphragm accumulator - Diaphragm Track roller Support roller Idler Central lubricating system

Check for leaks and free movement Check for leaks and free movement Check for leaks and free movement Check function

2x2









2x7









2x2









2x1

















1







1 1



 

 

Oilfilter (hydraulic circuit grea- Check for contamination and se pump) damage Replace Grease filter (filling grease Check for contamination and container) damage Replace Grease filter (grease lines) Check for contamination and damage Replace Breather filter Check / change

1 1



 

 

1 1



 

 

Air conditioner resp. heating - Air suction

(see: Air conditioner manual)

1







- Filter mat

Clean / replace

3







Hydraulic ladder

Lubricate







- Greasing points

Lubricate







3-22

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing

Plan A - after every 250 OH (at 250, 750, 1250 ... OH)

Plan B - after every 500 OH (at 500, 1500, 2500 ... OH)

Plan C - after every 1000 OH (at 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 ... OH)

Plan D - after every 5000 OH (at 5000, 15000, 25000 ... OH)

Plan E - after every 10000 OH (at 10000, 20000, 30000, ... OH) Page 7 of 7 Location On-board crane 14 - Bearing - Joint (column / boom) – Cylinder bearing – Swing ring Hydraulic system – Return-flow filter – Breather filter

Crane drive engine – Oil filter – Fastening bolts – Fuel filter – Air filter – Battery cable connection

Steel components

Modules – Fastening bolts Attachment - boom - stick All articulated joints and hinges

Servicing work

No. of

Lubricate Lubricate Lubricate Grease Change oil Replace Replace see “On-Board Crane“ operating instructions Clean Change oil Replace Check for tightness Replace Replace Check for tightness see “Crane Drive Engine“ operating instructions Visual inspection acc. to "Structural Inspection Report every 500 OH" 16 Inspection with dye penetrant test acc. to "Structural Inspection Report every 5000 OH" 16

4 2 5 1 1 15 1 1

Plan Plan Plan Plan Plan A B C D E

































1 1 15 1 1 1 1 2

Check for tightness







Check welding seams Check welding seams Grease

  

  

  

14

Do all servicing jobs at least once a year and when necessary

15

see “Refilling quantities – Oil“ table

16

"Structural Inspection Reports" for inspections every 500 OH and every 5000 OH can be downloaded from the Bucyrus HEX website, section "Support, Warranty".

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-23

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing LUBRICATING CHART

Fig. 3-1:

3-24

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Lubricating chart – Grease (legend) No. Greasing point 1 4 5

6

Number

Lubricant properties

Grease every .... operating hours 10 1000 250

Central lubricating system – grease container Hydraulic ladder On-board crane

1

V 17 V 17

- Bearing - Joint (column / boom)

4 2

V 17

- Cylinder bearing

5

- Swing ring

1

Graphitespray

250

2 x 4 18 3 x 2 18

V 17

1000 1000

250 250 250

Monitoring, warning and control elements - Joystick - Pedal

All other greasing points are supplied with grease by the central lubricating system.

Filling quantities - Grease Greasing point Central lubricating system – grease container Internal gearing – Roller-bearing swing ring Idler (permanent grease filling) Track rollers (permanent grease filling) (Not in use when machine is equipped with undercarriage greasing system) Support rollers (permanent grease filling) (Not in use when machine is equipped with undercarriage greasing system)

17

see "LUBRICANTS" section.

18

apply a thin layer of low temperature grease

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Lubricant properties

V 17 Tribol Bucyrus HEX part no. 2764564

Filling quant. kg

lb

appr. 1000 appr. 600 2 x appr. 36

appr. 2204.6 appr. 1322 2 x appr. 79.4

14 x appr. 45

14 x appr. 99.2

4 x appr. 15

4 x appr. 33

3-25

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing INSPECTION PLAN - OIL

Fig. 3-2:

3-26

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Inspection plan – Oil (legend) No. Location

Lubricant properties 19

I I

1

Engine

2

1

2

2

Engine with engine oil reservoir Engine oil reservoir

2

3

Hydraulic system

1

4

Pump transfer gearbox

2

I II III.a

Check oil level every ... OH 10

Change oil every ... OH 250

10

5000

10

5000

10

10000 20

60

1000

10

1000

10

1000

500

5000

- Pre-chambers

2x9

5

Swing gearbox

6

6

Travel gearbox

2

- Pre-chambers

2x2

500

5000

- Brake chambers

2x2

500

5000

10

250 21

10

1000 22

7

19

Number

III.b III.c

On-board crane - Crane drive engine

1

- Hydraulic oil reservoir

1

I II

see "LUBRICANTS" section

20

Change hydraulic oil every 5000 OH unless the oil is analyzed at regular intervals, but not later than every 3 years.

21

Change oil at least once a year.

22

Change hydraulic oil at least once a year.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-27

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing

Filling quantities - oil Location

Filling quantity

Oil

litres

gal

Engine

2 x appr. 260

2 x appr. 69

Engine oil reservoir

2 x appr. 640

2 x appr. 169

Hydraulic oil reservoir

appr. 10000

appr. 2640

Hydraulic oil total

appr. 13000

appr. 3450

Pump transfer gearbox - Pre-chambers

2 x appr. 160 9 x appr. 2

2 x appr. 42.3 9 x appr. 0.53

Swing gearbox

6 x appr. 19

6 x appr. 5

Travel gearbox

2 x appr. 215

2 x appr. 56.8

- Pre-chambers On-board crane - Crane drive engine

4 x appr. 2,5

4 x appr. 0.66

appr. 5.5

appr. 1.45

- Hydraulic oil reservoir

appr. 50

appr. 13.2

I I II II III.a III.b III.c I II

Filling quantities - other Location

Filling quantity litres

gal

Cooling system - engine

2 x appr. 350

2 x appr. 92.5

Fuel tank

2 x appr. 7550

2 x appr. 1994

Fuel tank, enlarged

2 x appr. 8502

2 x appr. 2246

Fuel tank, crane drive engine (optional)

appr. 20

appr. 5.3

Screen washer

appr. 13

appr. 3.4

3-28

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES Notes on the selection of oils and greases Original Bucyrus HEX oils and greases Besides regular and careful maintenance, the quality of the oils and greases used in the machine has a decisive influence on high performance, reliability and long service life of a machine and of its units and assemblies.

The lubricants tables in the Bucyrus HEX Operating Instructions contain specifications for the oils and greases that are approved for use in Bucyrus HEX machines. These oils and greases are especially adapted to Bucyrus HEX machines and their units and assemblies.

Other oils and greases which do not fulfil the requirements of the specifications can be the cause of premature wear or of damage to and failures of machine units and assemblies.

For this reason, Bucyrus HEX only approves the use of the specified oils and greases.

All other qualities are not approved.

Alternative oils and greases The oils and greases filled into the machine must meet at least the specifications mentioned in the lubricants tables of the Bucyrus HEX Operating Instructions.

In the event of damage to the machine or to its units and assemblies caused by the use of alternative oils and greases that are not compatible with Bucyrus HEX specifications, Bucyrus HEX does not assume any responsibility and does not accept any warranty claims.

Avoid mixing of different hydraulic fluids The machine has been run in at the factory with BM Long Term Hydraulic Fluid HSS (Part-No. 2482971). Bucyrus HEX recommends using this high-grade hydraulic fluid also in operation as it has been made especially for use in these machines to which it is also perfectly adapted.

If oil analyses are performed regularly and with positive results, the BM Long Term Hydraulic Fluid can remain in the machine for up to 10 000 operating hours.

If an alternative hydraulic fluid is to be used, it must fulfil the same specifications. Please note that the change interval for alternative fluids is fixed at 5 000 operating hours.

There is an increased risk of damage to hydraulic components, if different hydraulic fluids are mixed during topping up as well as when changing over to a fluid of a different type or from another manufacturer.

For topping up, it is therefore necessary to use only same hydraulic fluid as the one that is already in the hydraulic system.

When changing over to an alternative hydraulic fluid, please observe that there is always a small amount of old fluid remaining in the hydraulic system even after the system has been emptied. The mixing of this residual amount of old fluid with the new alternative fluid reduces the properties of the fluid dramatically and can cause damage to components of the hydraulic system in operation.

To avoid this result, the change-over to the alternative fluid must be performed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's prescriptions. The manufacturer must confirm that his hydraulic fluid is compatible with the BM Long Term Hydraulic Fluid.

The remaining amount of old fluid must not exceed 2% of the total volume. This can only be achieved by repeated flushing with the total fluid volume.

If the remaining amount of fluid exceeds 2% of the total volume, the fluid becomes a detrimental "mixed fluid".

The operation of the system with mixed fluids must by all means be avoided.

Bucyrus HEX assumes no warranty for damage caused as a result of the machine having been operated with consumables of inappropriate specification or with mixed fluids.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-29

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing

I.

Oils for combustion engines and compressors

Fig. 3-3:

3-30

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing

II.

Oils for hydraulic system (selection)

Fig. 3-4:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-31

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing III.a Oils for pump distribution gearboxes

Fig. 3-5:

3-32

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing III.b Oils for swing gearboxes

Fig. 3-6:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-33

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing III.c Oils for travel gearboxes

Fig. 3-7:

3-34

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing V.

Greases for bearings and swing rings

Fig. 3-8:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-35

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Fluid grease for idlers, track rollers and support rollers (Not in use when machine is equipped with undercarriage greasing system)

Fig. 3-9:

3-36

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing SERVICING WORK Hose line for oil and cooling liquid changes Collect escaping oil and cooling liquid and discard without polluting the environment.

The engines, the hydraulic oil reservoir, the pump transfer gearboxes, the swing gearboxes and the radiators (engine cooling liquid) are moreover equipped with automatic drain valves (1, Fig. 3-11:) These automatic drain valves permit oil- and cooling-liquid changes without polluting the environment.

Carry out oil changes when the machine is at operating temperature; warm oil drains away more easily.

Filling and draining is can be done by means of a hose through the service station (tanklift) (Fig. 3-10:).

For filling and draining, a flexible hose is connected to the express coupling on the service station and to the service vehicle at the other end.

The filling operations require an overpressure, whereas the draining operations require low pressure.

Fig. 3-11:

Change oil or cooling liquid as follows:  Place a collecting recipient for used oil or cooling liquid under the corresponding automatic drain valve. For the recipient capacity refer to the "Re-filling quantities - Oil" table or to the "Refilling quantities - Other" table.  Unscrew protective cap from automatic drain valve.  Screw on hose line (2) to open the valve, so that the oil or the cooling liquid can flow out.

Fig. 3-10:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

 When the oil or the cooling liquid has drained away, unscrew hose line to allow the valve to close automatically.  Screw protective cap back in place.

3-37

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing ENGINE Engine - Safety instructions Start and operate combustion engines only on well-ventilated premises.

In closed rooms, exhaust gases must be evacuated to the outside.

Do not work on the exhaust system an do not make any modifications to it.

Exhaust gases from diesel engines and some of their constituents may cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm.

Read and observe: "Inspection and Servicing – Safety Instructions" and the engine operating instructions.

Risk of injury from hot or rotating parts of the engine.

Shut off engines and allow to cool down.

Secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Attention, Ether!

The engine compartment can be equipped with pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether).

Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure.

These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

Protect the pressure vessels against damage before beginning to work in or close to the engine compartment.

Secure the machine as described in section “Securing the machine” before starting Inspection and Servicing.

“Retensioning the alternator belt”, “Checking and adjusting the valve clearance”, these and other servicing works are described in the engine manufacturer's operating instructions.

Skin contact with cooling liquid is a potential health hazard.

Protect the skin from potentially harmful contact with engine oil.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

3-38

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Engine oil, checking the oil level / topping up The engine oil pressure and oil temperature areconstantly monitored by the BCS (2, Fig. 3-12) when the machine is in operation.

The actual pressure and temperature of the engine oil can be displayed on the screen (2) and on the gauges (131, 133, 141, 143, Fig. 3-13).

The BCS warns the operator if the engine oil pressure is too low and the oil temperature too high.

Fig. 3-14:

 If the oil level is at the "min" mark or below, top up with engine oil through filler tube (2, Fig. 3-15:).

Fig. 3-12

Fig. 3-15:

Engine oil can also be filled in from the service station (Fig. 3-16:) through 

express coupling (8) for the lefthand engine,



express coupling (9) for the righthand engine

(see chapter "Changing the engine oil").

Fig. 3-13

 Park the machine on a horizontal surface and secure against inadvertent movements.  Shut off engines.  Draw out oil dipstick (1, Fig. 3-14:).  Wipe oil off the dipstick with a clean, lintfree cleaning rag and re-insert. Draw out dipstick a second time. The oil level should now lie between the marks (arrows, Fig. 3-14:).

Fig. 3-16:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-39

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Engine oil reservoir, checking the oil level The hydraulic shovel is equipped with an engine oil change interval prolonging mechanism.

The engine oil reservoirs are located in the cab module and in the iol cooling module.

If required the oil pans of the engines are automatically filled up with engine oil from the engine oil reservoirs.

That means the engine oil pans of the engines are sufficient filled up with engine oil as long as engine oil is in the engine oil reservoirs.

Check oil level in the engine oil reservoirs regulary and fill up if neccessary.

 Unlock the oil dipstick (1, Fig. 3-17:) and withdraw.  Wipe oil off the dipstick with a clean, lintfree cleaning rag and re-insert.  Draw out dipstick a second time. The oil level should lie at the mark. If the oil level is below, the engine oil is filled in from the service station (Fig. 3-18:) through 

express coupling (6) for the lefthand engine oil reservoir,



express coupling (7) for the righthand engine oil reservoir.

(see chapter "Engine oil reservoir - Changing the oil")

 Park the machine on a horizontal surface and secure against inadvertent movements.  Shut off engines.

Fig. 3-18:

Fig. 3-17:

3-40

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Changing the engine oil Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions".

Drawing off engine oil with the service station.  Bring engine oil to operating temperature.

Risk of scalding from hot engine oil.

 Park the machine on a horizontal surface and secure.

The engines may also be hot.

 Shut off the engines.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping oil and discard without polluting the environment.

Draw off the engine oil through 

express coupling (8, Fig. 3-19:) for the lefthand engine



express coupling (9) for the righthand engine.

 Unscrew cap of express coupling and connect hose line of the service vehicle.

The hose line and its use are described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid change" section.

Fig. 3-19:

After the engine oil has been drawn off:  Remove the hose line. The express coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-41

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Filling in engine oil  Fill in engine oil through filler tube (2, Fig. 3-20:) until the oil level has reached the "max" mark (Fig. 3-21:) on dipstick (1).

Filling in engine oil through the service station Fill in engine oil through 

express coupling (8, Fig. 3-22:) for the lefthand engine,



express coupling (9) for the righthand engine.

To do so  Unscrew cap of express coupling and connect filling hose of the service vehicle.

The hose line and its use are described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid change" section.  Fill in engine oil until the oil level has reached the "max." mark (Fig. 3-21:) on dipstick (1, Fig. 3-20:).

Fig. 3-20:

 Start the engines and allow to run at idling for abt. 2 minutes.  Check oil level at dipstick (1, Fig. 3-20:) and top up with oil to the "max" mark (Fig. 3-21:if required.

Fig. 3-21:

Fig. 3-22:

 Remove the filling hose.

The express coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.

3-42

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Engine oil reservoir, changing the oil Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions".

Draining off the oil  Bring engine oil to operating temperature.  Park the machine on a horizontal surface and secure the machine.  Shut off the engines.

Risk of scalding from hot engine oil.

The engines oil reservoirs may also be hot.

 Draw off engine oil with the service station through

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.



express coupling (6, Fig. 3-23:) for the lefthand engine oil reservoir,



express coupling (7) for the righthand engine oil reservoir.

Collect escaping oil and discard without polluting the environment.

To do so  Unscrew cap of express coupling and connect hose line of the service vehicle.

The hose line and its use are described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid change" section.

Fig. 3-23:

 Drain off engine oil.  Remove the hose line.

The express coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.  After the engine oil has been drawn off: Replace the engine oil filters.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-43

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Engine oil reservoir, filling in engine oil  Fill in engine oil until the oil reservoirs are filled. Monitoring lamp (1) for the lefthand oil reservoir, or monitoring lamp (2) for the righthand reservoir lit up when the reservoirs are filled.  Remove the hose line.

The express coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.  Switch off the display system with toggle switch (23, Fig. 3-24:), indicator lamp (22) is off.

Fig. 3-24:

The engine oil is filled in with the service station (Fig. 3-24:) through 

express coupling (6) for the lefthand engine oil reservoir,



express coupling (7) for the righthand engine oil reservoir.

To do so  Switch on the display system with toggle switch (23, Fig. 3-24:), indicator lamp (22) lits up.  Unscrew cap of express coupling and connect hose line of the service vehicle.

The hose line and its use are described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid change" section.

3-44

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Replacing the oil filters Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions".

Oil filters Carry out servicing of the full-flow oil filters (engine oil change interval prolongation) (1, Fig. 3-25:) in accordance with the engine operating instructions.

Risk of scalding from hot engine oil.

The filter housing may also be hot.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping oil and discard with-out polluting the environment

Fig. 3-25:

Replacement  Shut off the engines.  Unscrew the filters.  Install new filter together with slightly oiled sealing ring and tighten by hand.

Thereafter  Allow engines to run at idling for a short while and check filters for tightness and leaks before shutting off the engines.  Check oil level after abt. 10 minutes and top up, if required.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-45

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Eliminator filter and centrifuge Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions" and the Moatti Lube Oil Filter Instruction Book.

Risk of injury from rotating parts in the centrifuge.

The eliminator filter may be hot.

Wear protective gloves and firm protective clothing.

Collect escaping oil and discard without polluting the environment.

Centrifuge, servicing Engine oil impurities filtered out in the eliminator filters (1, Fig. 3-26:) are transported to the centrifuge (2) where they are filtered out by centrifugal force.

To do so:  Shut off engines.  Wait for 5 - 10 min. then dismantle the centrifuge.

Dismantling the centrifuge The rotor of the centrifuge must be stationary.

The pressure in the centrifuge must have been eliminated.

The rotor may be hot.

Wear protective gloves and firm protective clothing.  Slacken screws (2, Fig. 3-27:).  Slacken hollow screw (6) and remove together with cover (1).

Fig. 3-26:

Impurities in the engine oil are filtered out in the eliminator filter (1, Fig. 3-26:).

 Withdraw rotor housing (4) and set down on a timber base.  Unscrew nut (3) and remove rotor housing (4).  Remove dirt in rotor housing by tapping lightly.

Most of the cleaned engine oil flows back to the engine after being cleaned.

A small quantity of the engine oil flows in the bypass to the centrifuge (2).

The eliminator filter is self-cleaning and maintenance-free. (see "Moatti Lube Oil Filter Instruction Book")

Fig. 3-27:

3-46

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing  Withdraw plate assembly (12, Fig. 3-28:) from rotor (13).

Risk of injury.

The plates may have sharp edges.

Cleaning the centrifuge  Check the inside of the rotor housing.  Remove any dirt deposits without damaging the surface of the rotor housing. If necessary, clean all centrifuge parts in diesel fuel. Remove all residual dirt particles with compressed air or an air/water pistol.

Adhering dirt unbalances the rotor and may damage the bearings.

Assembling the centrifuge The plates (16, Fig. 3-29:) have 4 possible opposing positions.

Fig. 3-28:

 Place paper filter into the rotor cap (4, Fig. 3-28:):

 Remove clip (14, Fig. 3-29:) and distributor plate (15).

 Assembly is done in the reverse sequence to dismantling.

 Remove plates (16) and end plate (17) from distributor (18) .

 Run engines at idling speed for a short time and check centrifuge for leaks.  Shut off engines.  Check oil level after ca. 10 minutes; top up if necessary.

Fig. 3-29:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-47

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Cold-starting fluid (ether) - Replacing the pressure vessel

If the machine is used in low temperatures, the engine may be equipped with a cold-starting device.

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing Safety instructions"

The pressure vessel containing the cold-starting fluid (ether) can be installed in or near the engine compartment.

Risk of injury Cold-starting fluid is composed mainly of ether.

Ether is toxic when the mists and vapours are inhaled. Ether is harmful to the eyes, the skin, the respiratory system and the central nervous system.

Prolonged inhalation of ether can be fatal.

Replacing the pressure vessel:  Remove the clamp around the pressure vessel.

In contact with the skin, ether can cause frostbites and irritations.

 Unscrew the pressure vessel carefully from the metering valve.

Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure.

 Remove the used seal from the metering valve.

These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

 Insert a new seal into the valve (supplied with the new pressure vessel).

Before replacing an empty pressure vessel: Read and observe the instructions on the pressure vessels.

For further details please refer to the instructions and safety data-sheets of the manufacturer / supplier of pressure vessels with cold starting fluid (ether).

 Screw the new pressure vessel onto the metering valve and tighten by hand.  Fasten the clamp round the pressure vessel.

Even apparently empty pressure vessels can contain rests of ether and therefore explode if they are damaged or heated up above 49°C / 120°F. They must therefore be handled in the same way as full pressure vessels. 

Do not keep them on the machine.



Do not damage or open the vessels.

Provide for sufficient ventilation of the surroundings.



Do not expose the vessels to great heat or direct sunlight.

Do not eat, drink or smoke when replacing an empty vessel.



Do not dispose of in fire.



Keep the vessels in a place unaccessible to unauthorized persons.



Dispose of the vessels properly.

Do not inhale the vapours of escaping cold-starting fluid (ether).

Avoid skin contact. Wear suitable protective gloves and goggles.

3-48

The vessel is screwed onto an electro-mechanical metering valve. At temperatures below 0°C (32°F), this valve is activated automatically by the engine electronics and injects a precisely metered amount of cold-starting fluid into the air intake duct of the engine.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing COOLING SYSTEM Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions".

Secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Temperature The cooling liquid circuit is controlled by a thermostat. The max. admissible temperature is ca. 100° C / 212°F. In case of higher temperatures, the BCS displays a warning on the screen (Fig. 3-30:).

Shut off the engines and allow to cool down.

Risk of scalding from hot cooling liquid.

Collect escaping cooling liquid and discard without polluting the environment.

Protect the skin from contact with cooling liquid.

Skin contact with cooling liquid is a potential health hazard.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Fig. 3-30:

The temperature of the cooling liquid is also displayed by the gauges (132 and 142, Fig. 3-31:).

Gauge (132) shows the temperature of the cooling liquid in the left engine.

Gauge (142) shows the temperature of the cooling liquid in the right engine.

Fig. 3-31:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-49

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Radiators The radiators are located on the superstructure in the counterweight module.

Weekly checks:

The expansion reservoirs of the engine cooling system (2, Fig. 3-34:) are accessible from the superstructure.

Risk of scalding from hot cooling liquid.

 Check radiator fins for dirt and clean carefully and accurately, if required.

Wait until cooling liquid has cooled down.

Checking cooling-liquid level

Open caps of the expansion reservoirs cautiously.

An insufficient cooling-liquid level is displayed on the BCS screen (Fig. 3-32:).

 Check cooling-liquid level at the monitoring device (4). The cooling-liquid level must reach the markings at the monitoring device.  If required, top up cooling liquid.  To do so, turn cap of the filler tube (1) back to the first notch.  When the pressure has been released turn cap into the "open" position and remove.

The cooling-liquid level must be between the “min“ and “max” markings at the monitoring device (4).  After topping up cooling-liquid screw cap of the filler neck (1) back in place.

Fig. 3-32:

Insufficient cooling-liquid levels are also monitored by the warning lamps (136 and 146, Fig. 3-33:).

Warning lamp (136) is for the cooling system of the lefthand engine, warning lamp (146) is for the cooling system of the righthand engine.

Fig. 3-34:

Fig. 3-33:

3-50

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Topping up cooling-liquid Cooling liquid can be topped up through the filler tube of the expansion reservoirs or through the service station (tanklift).

Risk of scalding from hot cooling liquid.

Wait until cooling liquid has cooled down.

Open caps of the expansion reservoirs cautiously.

Do not fill in cold cooling liquid when the engine is at operating temperature.

Before refilling, allow engine to cool down to below 50° C / 122°F.

 Fill small amounts of cooling liquid through filler tube (1, Fig. 3-35:) into the cooling system.

For topping up of the cooling system use specially prepared water only.

Specially prepared water must consist of: 

calcium-free water, distilled water, rain water,



anti-freeze compound.

The anti-freeze compound must always be filled into the system independent of climatic conditions.

In this case, it serves as corrosion protection for the aluminium cooler.

The mixing ratio of anti-freeze / cooling water must be at least 50 % : 50 % (anti-freeze protection down to -40 °C / -40°F).

For use at lower temperatures, the amount of antifreeze must be increased accordingly.

For further detailled information see engine manufacturers operation and maintenance manual.  After topping up cooling-liquid screw cap of the filler tube (1) back in place.

After filling in cooling liquid allow the engines to run for short period to eliminate air voids before topping up with cooling liquid until the cooling liquid level is between the “min” and “max” marking of the monitoring device (4).

In case of significant cooling-liquid losses, the whole cooling system must be checked for leaks.

Check regularly:  all lines for leaks and all hose clamps for tightness.

Fig. 3-35:

Checking the SCA concentration Observe the instructions of the engine manufacturer with regard to the SCA concentration (see engine manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual).

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-51

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Topping up cooling liquid through the service station The cooling liquid can also be filled in with the service station (Fig. 3-36:) through 

express coupling (2) for the lefthand engine,



express coupling (3) for the righthand engine.

Cooling liquid change Risk of scalding from hot cooling liquid.

The radiators may also be hot.

Wait until cooling liquid and radiators have cooled down.

Open caps of the expansion reservoirs cautiously.

Do not fill in cold cooling liquid when the engine is at operating temperature.

Before refilling, allow engine to cool down to below 50° C / 122°F. Read and observe: Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Fig. 3-36:

 Turn cap of the filler tube (1, Fig. 3-37:) back to the first notch.

When the pressure has been released turn cap into the "open" position and remove.

Collect escaping cooling liquid and discard without polluting the environment.

The cooling liquid must be changed regularly and after two years at the latest.

 Fill in cooling-liquid using the hose line.

The hose line and its use are described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid change" section.  Check cooling-liquid level at the monitoring device (4).  Remove hose from express coupling.

The express coupling closes automatically.

Screw on protective cap.  Screw cap of the filler neck (1) back in place.

Fig. 3-37:

3-52

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Drawing off cooling liquid through the service station

Filling in cooling liquid Fill in cooling liquid with the service station (Fig. 3-38:) through 

express coupling (2) for the lefthand cooling circuit,



express coupling (3) for the righthand cooling circuit.

 Unscrew cap of express coupling. Connect hose of the service vehicle.

The hose line and its use are described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid changes" section.  Fill in cooling-liquid.

Fig. 3-38:

 Check cooling-liquid level at the monitoring device (4, Fig. 3-37:).

The cooling liquid can be drawn off with the service station (Fig. 3-38:) through

 Remove hose from express coupling.

The coupling closes automatically.



 Screw on protective cap.



express coupling (2) for the lefthand cooling circuit,

 Screw cap of the filler neck (1) back in place.

express coupling (3) for the righthand cooling circuit.

 Turn cap of the filler tube on the expansion reservoir (1, Fig. 3-37:) back to the first notch.

When the pressure has been released turn cap into the "open" position and remove.  Unscrew cap of express coupling. Connect hose line of the service vehicle.

The hose line and its use are described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid changes" section.  Draw off cooling liquid.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Testing the cooling liquid composition The engine operating instructions contain a detailed description of how to prepare and test the cooling liquid composition. In case of imminent frost check that the factory-adjusted anti-freeze concentration is sufficient for the expected temperatures.

Check the cooling liquid in the cooling system regularly to ensure that the water filter replacement interval resp. the SCA mixture is sufficiently concentrated to prevent corrosion under the corresponding operating conditions.

3-53

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Water filter change Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions".

For further detailled information see engine manufacturers operation and maintenance manual.

Risk of scalding from hot cooling liquid.

The filter housings may be hot, too.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping cooling liquid and discard without polluting the environment.

Replace water filter regularly.

Fig. 3-39:

The water filters (Fig. 3-39:) are mounted at the engine housing.  Close valves (2, Fig. 3-39:).  Unscrew water filters (1).

Tightening the filter element with a tool can damage or deform the filter head.  Screw on new water filter until the sealing ring contacts the filter head. Continue to tighten the filter by another ½ to ¾ turn.  Open valves (2).

3-54

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing AIR-INTAKE SYSTEM Read and observe the "Engine - Safety instructions" chapter.

Risk of injury caused by rotating or hot parts of the engine.

Shut off the engines before working on the airintake system.

Main filter elements Insufficient air-intake performance, caused by acontaminated main filter element, is displayed on the BCS-screen (Fig. 3-41:).

Clean or renew main filter elements only if the BCS displays a warning on the screen (Fig. 3-41:) or the vacuum-meters (8, Fig. 3-42:) show a red signal with the engines running at high speed.

Secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Do not start the engine when parts of the air-intake system have been detached.

Engine damage may occur if the engine is allowed to draw in unfiltered air.

Each engine is equipped with six dry-air filters (Fig. 3-40:) consisting of main and safety filter element.

Fig. 3-41:

Fig. 3-40:

Fig. 3-42:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-55

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Removal and installation  Unscrew nut (1, Fig. 3-43:)) and remove cover (2).  Unscrew nut (4) and withdraw main filter element (5). Do not loose the washer under nut (4).  Replace or clean main filter element New or cleaned main filter elements should always be at hand to shorten hydraulic shovel downtimes.

Before installing the filter element, clean contact faces at cover (2, Fig. 3-43:) and at filter housing.  Put on cover (2) and tighten nut (1).

During the removal of the main filter element, the safety element (7, Fig. 3-44:) must remain in the filter housing.

Fig. 3-43:

Fig. 3-44:

3-56

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Checking and cleaning the main filter element Examine the filter paper of the element with a lamp which is introduced into the element (Fig. 3-45:).

Any damage is then clearly visible.

Replace damaged or deformed elements immediately.

 Check element seal. When the seal is damaged, the filter element must be replaced, too.

Cleaning with compressed air is suitable if the filter element is to be re-used immediately.  Blow filter element (Fig. 3-46:) clean with dry compressed air from the inside by moving the compressed-air gun up and down.

Fig. 3-45:

The pressure at the nozzle must not exceed 3 bars / 43psi.

Cleaning is terminated when all visible dust has been blown out of the filter element.

Never clean filter element by beating against hard objects.

 Replace the main filter element after 1000 operating hours or 3 cleaning cycles; and, after one year of operation at the latest.

Fig. 3-46:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-57

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Safety filter element Replacement Replace the safety filter elements (7, Fig. 3-47:) after 1000 operating hours or 3 cleaning cycles; after one year of operation at the latest.

Never clean the safety filter element, but always renew.

 Remove main filter element (5, Fig. 3-48:) as described above.  Check the vacuum indicator (6, Fig. 3-47: resp. arrow Fig. 3-49:) whether - the green spot is visible; in this case the safety filter must not be replaced - the green spot is not visible; in this case the safety filter must be replaced.

Fig. 3-47:

 Unscrew vacuum indicator (6) and withdraw safety filter element (7).  Install the new safety filter element and a cleaned or a new main filter element.

Fig. 3-48:

Fig. 3-49:

3-58

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Air-intake lines

Dust collection

At regular intervals:

Dust accumulating on the filter-housing bottom is constantly sucked away by the exhaust system during operation.

 Check all parts of intake lines for leaks and hose clamps for tightness;  Replace defective rubber parts and clamps between filter housing and engine.

During all works on the air-intake system ensure proper sealing to prevent unfiltered air from reaching the engines.

The non-return valves (1, Fig. 3-50:) in the suction lines prevent engine exhaust gases from being sucked in.

At regular intervals:  check suction lines for leaks and hose clamps for tightness.

Fig. 3-50:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-59

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing FUEL SYSTEM Fuel system - Safety instructions

Replacing the fuel filters Risk of injury When working at the fuel filters it is necessary to keep the engine running.

Keep away from hot or rotating parts of the engine.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

When working on the fuel system: 

secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section,



keep away naked flames,



do not smoke.

Collect escaping fuel and discard without polluting the environment.

Avoid skin contact with diesel fuel.

Diesel fuel may cause skin injury.

Wear firm working clothing.

Wear protective gloves or use a barrier cream.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

The machine is equiped with a triple fuel filter set (Fig. 3-52:). First replace the right or left filterelement. Replace the filterelement in the center position at last.

Fuel filter change is necessary after 250 OH or when the fuel level in the clear filter cover reaches the red line at the filter element.  Leave engine running.  When starting with the left filter, swing the handle (1, Fig. 3-51:) on the left filter to the "OFF" position. To change the right filter, swing the handle on the right filter to the "OFF" position.  Place a collecting vessel for escaping fuel under the filter to be replaced.

Fig. 3-51:

3-60

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing  Loosen the vent cap (1, Fig. 3-52:) on the filter to be replaced.  Open the drain valve (5) and drain the fuel.

Then close the drain valve (5).

Fig. 3-52:

 Using the collar / vent cap wrench (Fig. 3-53:) remove the clear cover (2, Fig. 3-52:) by removing the collar (4).

Fig. 3-54:

 Install the new filter (3) and grommet (7) on the filter stud.  Place the new cover O-ring (8), cover (2) and collar (4) over the filter.  Press down filter, holding it in place, while hand tightening the the collar until seated. Do not use tools to tighten.  Fill the clear cover (2) with enough fresh, clean fuel to cover the bottom half of the filter element.  Make shure the new O-ring (6) is installed on the vent cap (1), install the vent cap (1). Tighten by hand.

Fig. 3-53:

 Discard the O-ring (8, Fig. 3-54:) from the base of the cover (2).  Remove the filter element (3) by pulling upwards and twisting slightly from the filter stud.

Remove the sealing grommet (7) too.

New O-ring seals and grommet are supplied with the new filterelements.

Dispose of the filter in an environmently responsible manner according to the state, federal, national and / or global environmental recommendations.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

 Swing the valve handle (1, Fig. 3-51:) into position "ON".  Raise the engine rpm for one minute to purge the air from the system.  Replace the other outer filter the same way.  Then replace the center fuel filter (see. "Replacing the center fuel filter").  After then replace the filters at the other engine.

3-61

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Replacing the center fuel filter

Fuel filters, draining water

 Now replace the filterelement located in the center position.

Drain water from the triple fuel filters weekly. To do so:

 Leave the engine running.

 Turn off the engine and open the filter vent (1, Fig. 3-56:).

 Swing both the right and the left handles (1, Fig. 3-55:) to the "ON" position and the center unit valve handle to the "OFF" position.  Change filter as described above.  Swing the center valve to the "ON" position.  Ensure that all three handles (1) are in the "ON" position.  Check the fuel system for leaks.

 Place a cup under the drain valve at the base and open the drain valve (5).  Water will flow into the cup. When fuel begins to flow out of the drain, close the drain valve (5).  Close the filter vent (1).  Start the engine. Raise the engine rpm for one minute to purge the air from the system.  Drain water from the fuel filters at the other engine.

Fig. 3-55:

Fig. 3-56:

3-62

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Fuel tank, replace breather filter

Cleaning the fuel tanks

The fuel tanks are vented with breather valves (3, Fig. 3-57:).

Explosion hazard.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing.

Safety instructions" chapter.

Replace breather valves regularly according to the inspection plans. To do so:  Unscrew the caps (3), replace filterelements and screw caps back in place.

Do not use white spirit, paraffin oil or other solvents.

For flushing and cleaning use diesel fuel.

Avoid skin contact.

Skin contact with diesel fuel may cause skin injury.

Wear firm working clothing.

Wear protective gloves or use a barrier cream.

Fuel must be prevented from penetrating into the soil. Keep fuel for re-use or discard without polluting the environment.  Use up as much fuel as possible.

Fig. 3-57:

 Check how much fuel remains in the tank and place a collecting recipient of sufficient size under the drain plugs of the tanks.  Loosen drain plug (5, Fig. 3-58:) at the fuel tank and drain off fuel.  Flush tank with diesel fuel.  Screw automatic drain plug back (5) in place.

Fig. 3-58:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-63

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing  Fill in fuel through the strainer in filler tube (2, Fig. 3-59:)  Fuel can also be filled into both fuel tanks through the service station (1, Fig. 3-60:).  Unscrew cap of express coupling.

Connect filling hose of the service vehicle.

The hose line and its use are described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid change" section.

The filling level is displayed on the BCS screen (Fig. 3-61:).  Remove filling hose.

The express coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.

Fig. 3-59:

Fig. 3-60:

Fig. 3-61:

3-64

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Electrical system - Safety instructions

Alternator - Instructions Never disconnect cables from the alternator, regulator and the battery when the engine is running to avoid damage to the alternator and regulator.

Risk of injury caused by battery acid and gases.

Do not interchange the cables when connecting the battery (observe polarity).

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Carry out voltage and continuity checks only by means of a test lamp or a measuring instrument.

Do not check by "touching ground" with a bare wire. The short-circuit thus produced damages the alternator and the regulator.

Wear goggles, working gloves and firm working clothing.

Cables and cable lugs must not get in contact with other metal parts. Replace broken or damaged cables and the respective cable lugs.

Carry out voltage and continuity checks only by means of a test lamp or a measuring instrument.

Do not check by "touching ground" with a bare wire. The short-circuit thus produced damages the alternator and the electronic modules of the PMS.

Electrical circuit diagrams The electrical circuit diagrams and wiring diagrams are annexed to the spare-parts list. Further information can be found in the Bucyrus HEX Technical Handbook "Working with circuit diagrams".

Electrical system switch-cabinets The electrical system switch-cabinets are located in the cab module, in the pump compartment and behind the hydraulic reservoir. The cabinets are described in the spare-parts list (electrical circuit diagram) together with the designation of the electrical components.

Fuses and their function are listed on a sheet inside the switch-cabinets in the cab module.

Replacing lamps and bulbs If a bulb does not work after replacement, the pertaining fuses, connection cables and contacts must be checked.

Xenon-working floodlights are operated with high voltage.

Read and observe the chapter: “Floodlight projector, replacing the lamp”.

Floodlights working with LED-technology do not have replacable lamps / bulbs. The floodlight must be replaced if defective.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-65

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Xenon floodlight projector, replacing the lamp Safety instructions The floodlight projectors use xenon technology.

The lamp is not a usual incandescent lamp, but a gas discharge lamp which is operated with a ballast unit. The ballast unit is integrated in the floodlight projector.

When the projector is turned on, the ballast unit generates a high-voltage pulse of more than 25000 volts to start the xenon lamp.

Warning!

This high-voltage pulse can be a lifethreatening risk, if a person comes into contact with any of the live components. This can be the case, for instance, 

if the lamp is operated improperly,



if the projector housing is opened in an inapropriate way or



by sticking one's hand into an opened or damaged projector.

Protect yourself from potential risks by reading and by observing the following safety instructions.

Always switch off the projector and disconnect it from its power supply before replacing the Xenon lamp.

Allow the xenon lamp to cool off before removing it from the projector.

Wear googles and safety gloves when replacing the lamp.

Never stick your hand into the lampholder. The contacts may still be live with residual voltage.

Never switch on the projector when the xenon lamp has been removed.

There is a risk of voltage discharge and damage to the lampholder.

The glass body of the xenon lamp is filled with different gases and metal gases and is under gauge pressure (risk of injury from splinters).

If the xenon lamp breaks apart in closed room (workshop), all persons must leave the room and the room must be ventilated for at least 20 minutes to exclude any health risks caused by gases.

Further instructions Always hold the xenon lamp by the base. Never touch the glass bulb. Sweat and grease from the skin would evaporate when the lamp is in operation and obscure the reflector.

If the fingers have nevertheless come into contact with the glass bulb, the fingerprints must be removed with a clean cloth and some alcohol.

The replaced Xenon lamp must be disposed of as special waste.

Never switch on projectors when housing or electrical wiring is damaged.

Have damaged projectors be replaced by a qualified electrician as soon as possible.

3-66

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Replacing a defective Xenon-lamp Read and observe the: „Xenon floodlight projector, replacing the lamp, Safety instructions“.  Switch off the projector, shut off the engine and cut out the battery main switch.  Wait until the housing of the floodlight projector has cooled down.  Withdraw the power supply connector from the projector.

Fig. 3-62

 Remove four screws (1, Fig. 3-62) and withdraw the reflector (2) from the projector housing.  Withdraw connector (Fig. 3-63) from Xenon lamp socket.  Unscrew Xenon lamp holding clamp (Fig. 3-64).  Remove the defective Xenon lamp and replace by a new one. Do not touch the glass bulb of the lamp.  Reinstall the new lamp. Screw lamp holding clamp back in place.  Plug the power supply connector onto the lamp.  Re-assemble the housing.

Fig. 3-63

Fig. 3-64

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-67

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Lighting systems in LED technonogy, instructions The lights of the maintenance lighting system (Fig. 3-65) as well as the working floodlights (Fig. 3-66) are equipped with lamps in LED technology (lightemitting diodes).

High-performance LEDs ensure the emission of light with high luminance. If the light is allowed to shine directly into the eyes from a short distance and over prolonged periods, there is a risk of injury to the retina.

Do not look for a prolonged period into the light cones of the LEDs. Adjust the lights in such way that they do not shine directly into the eyes and that you are not blinded by the glare.

The lights become hot in operation.

The heat is dispersed via the ribbed metal housing.

Fig. 3-65

For this reason, the housings must not be covered up and cleaning rags or similar things placed over them.

The high-performance LEDs in these lights have a very long service life and can therefore not be replaced. If one or more of these LEDs fail, the light can remain in service if the remaining luminance is still sufficient.

Fig. 3-66

3-68

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Battery Warning! Battery Posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling.

Checking charge of batteries The acid temperature must be 20 ° C / 68°F.  Unscrew caps of the battery (Fig. 3-67:).  Measure the acid density of the battery using a commercial acid tester (Fig. 3-67:).

The acid density measured is in direct correlation with the battery charge.

Checking the battery fluid level (Not applicable in case of maintenance-free batteries)  Unscrew caps (Fig. 3-67:).  If checking inserts are provided, the battery acid must reach up to their bottom.  If no checking inserts are provided, insert a clean wooden rod into the battery until it contacts the upper edge of the cell plates. The rod must be moistened over at least 10 mm / 0.4".

Acid density kg / dm3 Charge Normal Tropical conditicondition ons 1,28 1,23 fully charged 1,20 1,12 half charged, recharge 1,12 1,08 discharged, recharge immediately

 If the fluid level is too low, top up with distilled water only.

Fig. 3-67:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-69

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Removing and installing the battery Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

 Detach battery holder.  Disconnect the cable lug from the negative terminal of the battery.  Disconnect the cable lug from the positive terminal of the battery.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

 Insulate the cable lugs.

Shut off the engines before removing the batteries to avoid damaging the alternator and the regulator.

 Lift battery out of battery box.

Turn key in key-switch to position "0" and withdraw.

Before installing new batteries, the contact faces of the battery terminal posts and the cable lugs must be cleaned down to the bright metal.

Disconnect and reconnect the terminal clamping lugs in the prescribed order.

 Install the new batteries.

Disconnecting and connecting in the wrong order may cause short-circuits.

The batteries (1, Fig. 3-68:) are located under the cover behind the hydraulic oil reservoir.

The 12-volt batteries are connected in series and in parallel, so that the system voltage is 24 volts.

 Connect the cable lug to the positive terminal of the battery. Tighten the clamping screws of the cable lugs. Do not use too much force to avoid deformation.  Connect the cable lug to the negative terminal of the battery.  Apply special terminal grease or acid-free vaseline on the battery terminal posts and clamping lugs. Loose or corroded clamping lugs will lead to alternator or regulator overloading.

Fig. 3-68:

3-70

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Charging batteries inside the machine, safety instructions Explosion hazard.

Battery gases are highly flammable.

Keep any potential ignition sources, such as unshielded lights or burning cigarettes, away from the batteries.

Charging the batteries  Cut out the battery main switch.  For battery ventilation unscrew the cover of the battery cabinet.  Connect the charging cable to the socket outlet (Fig. 3-69:).  Switch on the charger and watch the charging process.

Risk of injury from acid splashes and battery gases.

Stop the charging process: 

if the batteries are getting hot,

Wear safety goggles or a face protection shield and acid proof protective gloves.



if acid escapes from the batteries,



if the charge current is still insignificantly low even after 15 minutes of charging.

Do not lean over the batteries while charging.

Before starting a new charging cycle, check the batteries and the connecting cable thoroughly and replace any damaged components. It may be necessary to remove the batteries and to charge them one by one.

The batteries of the machine can also be charged while installed in the machine.

For this purpose, the arm of the service station (Fig. 3-69:) is equipped with a socket outlet for a charging cable.

When the batteries are full:  Shut off the charger first before withdrawing the charging cable from the socket outlet.

Risk of fire

Read the instructions of the charger in order to know when the charging cycle has ended.

Do not use the socket outlet (Fig. 3-69:) for jump-starting of the engines.

The batteries are fully charged, if

The connectors and the cables are not designed for the high currents flowing during the starting phase.

Check before charging why the batteries are discharged and replace the batteries if they are defective.



the charging current and voltage remain constant (for voltage-controlled chargers);



the charging current does not any rise longer for two hours (current-controlled chargers);



the charger shuts off or switches over to trickle charge (automatic chargers).

Check the connecting cables of the battery set for damage, corrosion and tight fit.

Never charge the batteries while they are frozen.

Warm them up beforehand and check for proper functioning.

Do not charge the batteries when they are warmer than "warm to the touch" (45 °C / 113 °F).

Use only approved chargers for 24 volts DC. Read and observe the instructions for the charger.

The charging cable must have a conductor crosssection of at least 70 mm2.

Fig. 3-69:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-71

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Switchgear cabinet Breather filter In the switchgear cabinet, the air is drawn in by a ventilator via the filter (Fig. 3-70:).

Emptying dust trap  Press dust trap (14, Fig. 3-70:) and hold until the dust trap is empty.

Emptying the dust collector  Loosen clamps (11, Fig. 3-70:).  Remove dust collector (12) and empty.

Filter element  Remove the dust collector (12, Fig. 3-70:).

Fig. 3-70:

 Withdraw filter element (13, Fig. 3-71:).  Replace or clean filter element (13).  Refit dust collector (12, Fig. 3-70:).

Fig. 3-71:

3-72

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Checking and cleaning the filter element  Check the filter paper of the element by inserting a lamp into the element (Fig. 3-72:). Any damage can then be seen.

Replace damaged or distorted element immediately.

 Check element seal. If damaged, replace filter element too.

Cleaning with compressed air allows the filter element to be re-used immediately.  Blow filter element (Fig. 3-73:) dry with compressed air by moving the compressed-air piston up and down inside it.

Fig. 3-72:

The pressure at the nozzle must not exceed 3 bars / 43psi.

Cleaning is completed when no more dust is seen to leave the filter element.

Never clean filter element by beating it against hard objects.

 Replace main filter element after 1000 operating hours or 3 cleaning cycles, but not later than after one year of operation.

Fig. 3-73:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-73

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Hydraulic system - Safety instructions Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Before working on the hydraulic system, make sure that the system is without pressure and that the residual pressures have also been eliminated.

Shut off the engines.

Risk of burning caused by hot hydraulic components (e.g. hydraulic oil reservoir, cylinder, valves).

Secure the machine as described in the "Securing the mmachine section.

Depressurizing the hydraulic system Hydraulic systems may only be opened if they are completely depressurized.

Even when an hydraulic shovel is parked on a horizontal surface with the working equipment resting on the ground (Fig. 3-74:) and with its drive engines stationary, there may still be a considerable amount of residual pressure in parts of the hydraulic system, as e.g. the primary pressure resulting from the last hydraulic movements before the immobilization.

Residual pressures disappear only gradually. If work is to be carried out on the hydraulic system immediately after the immobilization, the system must be freed from pressure, i.e. depressurized:

Avoid skin contact with hydraulic oil.

Contact with hydraulic oil can cause skin injury.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Fig. 3-74:

 Locate the system section to be opened.  Depressurize the section to be opened. If required, the necessary measures described must be combined  Open the depressurized system section with caution.

3-74

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Examples of system sections: 1) working hydraulics 2) servo control circuit 3) precharged return-flow line Depressurizing  Park the hydraulic shovel on a horizontal surface.

Checking the hydraulic oil level  Bring hydraulic oil to operating temperature (abt. 50 °C / 122°F).  Park the machine on a horizontal surface.  Move all hydraulic cylinders to their central positions.

The oil level must lie between the “min” and “max” marks of the decals (2) beside the inspection glass (1, Fig. 3-76:).

 Set the working equipment on the ground.  Shut off the drive engines.  Do not switch off the electrical system Sections 1 and 2: servo control and working hydraulics - Shift both control levers repeatedly into all dIrections (Fig. 3-75:).

Fig. 3-76:

The hydraulic oil level is monitored by the BCS. The BCS displays a warning on the screen (Fig. 3-77:) if the hydraulic oil level is too low or too high.

Shut off the engines, locate cause and rectify.

Fig. 3-75:

Section 3: return-flow line After shutting down the engine, the precharging pressure decreases rapidly through the precharging valve. No measures are required before opening the return-flow line.

Fig. 3-77:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-75

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing  Fill in hydraulic oil until the oil level lies between the “min” and the “max” marks of the decals (2) beside the inspection glass (1, Fig. 3-79:) (oil grade see "LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES").

The acoustic warning signal “Travel Alarm” sounds.  Unscrew the hose line; the express coupling closes automatically.  Screw protective cap back in place

Fig. 3-78

 Stand working equipment on the ground as shown on the sign (Fig. 3-79:).

Signs (2, Fig. 3-79:) are attached beside the inspection glass (1).

Fig. 3-80:

Hydraulic oil can also be filled in through the return-flow filters. To do so:  Remove cover (3, Fig. 3-81:).  Fill in hydraulic oil through the opening until the oil level lies between the “min” and the “max” marks of the decals (2, Fig. 3-79:) beside the inspection glass (1). (oil grade see "LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES").  Before fitting the cover (3, Fig. 3-81:), check the sealing ring and replace, if damaged.  Fit cover together with sealing ring.

Fig. 3-79:

Fill in hydraulic oil by means of the service station (Fig. 3-80:).  Unscrew cap of express coupling (10).

Connect filling hose express coupling of the service vehicle.

The use of the hose line is described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid changes" section.

Fig. 3-81:

3-76

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Changing the hydraulic oil returnflow (hydraulic oil reservoir) Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Shut off the engines.

The return-flow filters must be replaced: 

when servicing works in accordance with the servicing plan are carried out;



when the BCS displays a warning on the screen (Fig. 3-82:). In this case, the filter elements (9, Fig. 3-83:) are heavily contaminated;



after repairs on the hydraulic system;



in case of damage.

Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The hydraulic oil reservoir itself may also be hot.

Avoid skin contact.

 Remove cover (3) together with sealing ring (5) and retaining disk (7).

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury.

 Remove cap (8) and sealing ring (10).

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

 Withdraw filter element (9) and sealing ring (11) from basket (12).

Collect escaping hydraulic oil and discard without polluting the environment.

 Insert a new filter element.

Fig. 3-82: Fig. 3-83:

 If a filter element (9) is damaged, remove basket (12) and check/clean.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-77

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing  Loosen screws (13, Fig. 3-84:) and take off spring clip (14) and disk (15).  Remove basket (12) and clean in paraffin oil.  Install basket (12).  Insert filter element (9) together with sealing ring (11) and cap (8) with sealing ring (10).

 Replace also the return-flow filter in the filter housing (cooling-system).

The return-flow filters are located under the caps (30, Fig. 3-85:).

(Cf. under "Hydraulic oil return-flow filter / Filter housing (cooling-system")).

 Refit cover (3).  Clean the magnetic rod The magnetic rod is located under cap (19).

If metal filings are detected, locate cause and rectify.

Contact the Bucyrus HEX Service, if required.

Fig. 3-85:

Fig. 3-84:

3-78

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Bypass valves (hydraulic oil reservoir) Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Shut off the engines.

Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The hydraulic oil reservoir itself may also be hot.

Avoid skin contact.

 Check sealing ring for damage and replace, if required.  Re-assemble the bypass valve.  Check sealing ring (24) for damage and replace, if required.  Insert bypass valve and fasten with screws (22).  Clean also the screen of the bypass valve in the filter housing (cooling-system).

The bypass valve is located under the cover (10, Fig. 3-87:). (Cf. under "Bypass valves / Filter housing (cooling-system").

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping hydraulic oil and discard without polluting the environment.

Cleaning the filter screens

Fig. 3-87:

Replacing the bypass valves and sealing rings  Remove bypass valve as described under "Cleaning the screens".  Re-assemble the bypass valve with a new screen (23, Fig. 3-87:) and a new sealing ring.  Insert bypass valve with new sealing ring (24) and fasten with screws (22).

Fig. 3-86:

 Remove cover (3, Fig. 3-86: resp. Fig. 3-87:) together with sealing ring (5).  Unscrew screws (22). Withdraw bypass valve.

 Replace also the bypass valve and sealing ring in the filter housing (cooling-system).

The bypass valve is located under the cover (30, Fig. 3-87:). (Cf. under "Bypass valves / Filter housing (cooling-system").

 Take off screen (23) together with sealing ring and clean in white spirit or paraffin oil. Replace, if required.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-79

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Replacing the hydraulic oil return-flow filters (filter housing)

Replace the return-flow filters (35, Fig. 3-88:) together with the return-flow filters in the hydraulic oil reservoir.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Shut off the engines.

Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The hydraulic oil reservoir itself may also be hot.

Avoid skin contact.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping hydraulic oil and discard without polluting the environment.

Fig. 3-88:

 Detach cover (30) together with sealing ring (36).  Remove retaining disk (33) together with sealing rings (32 and 37).  Withdraw filter element (35).  Insert a new filter element.  Clean the magnetic rod (31).

If metal filings are detected, locate cause and rectify.

Contact the Bucyrus HEX Service, if required.  Refit cover (30) with new sealing ring (36).

3-80

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Bypass valves (filter housing cooling system) Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions" chapter.

Shut off the engines.

Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The hydraulic oil reservoir itself may also be hot.

Avoid skin contact.

Cleaning the screens Clean/replace the bypass valves (Fig. 3-89:) together with the bypass valves in the hydraulic oil reservoir.  Detach cover (30) together with sealing ring (36).  Unscrew screws (22) and withdraw bypass valve.  Take off screen (23) together with sealing ring (24) and clean in white spirit or paraffin oil; replace, if required.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury.

 Check sealing ring (24) for damage and replace, if required.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

 Re-assemble the bypass valve.

Collect escaping hydraulic oil and discard without polluting the environment.

 Insert bypass valve and fasten with screws (22).  Refit cover (30) with a new sealing ring (36).

Replacing the bypass valves and sealing rings Replace the bypass valves and sealing rings together with the bypass valves in the hydraulic oil reservoir.  Remove the bypass valve as described under "Cleaning the screens".  Re-assemble the bypass valve with a new screen (23) and a new sealing ring (24).  Insert bypass valve with new sealing ring (24) and fasten with screws (22).  Refit cover (30) with a new sealing ring (36).

Fig. 3-89:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-81

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Breather filter Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions" chapter.

Replacing the filter elements The breather filters (20, Fig. 3-90:) ensure venting of the hydraulic oil reservoir at varying hydraulic oil levels.

Shut off the engines.

Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The hydraulic oil reservoir itself may also be hot.

Avoid skin contact.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Fig. 3-90:

 Unscrew screws (21). Remove holder (22) and withdraw filter element (20).  Check filter element and replace, if required.

3-82

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Filter (control circuit) Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions" chapter.

Replacing the filter element Change filter element regulary and when the BCS indicates a contamination.

Shut off the engines.

Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The filter housings may also be hot.

Avoid skin contact.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Fig. 3-91:

 Unscrew filter housing (5, Fig. 3-91:).  Withdraw filter element (6) from filter housing (5).  Clean filter housing (5) and the sealing face at the filter head (9) with white spirit or paraffin oil.  Check seals (10 and 14) and replace, if required.  Insert new filter element into filter housing (5) and refit to the filter head with new, lightly oiled sealing ring (8).  Check for leaks after putting the filter into operation.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-83

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing High-pressure filter for working hydraulics To filter the hydraulic oil on the high-pressure side of the working hydraulic system, the machine is equipped with eight high-pressure filters (9, Fig. 3-92:).

Checking/cleaning the filter elements  Unscrew drain plug (11, Fig. 3-93:) and drain the hydraulic oil from the filter housing (9).

(Place a suitable resipient under the filter housing).  Unscrew filter housing (9).  Disengage filter element (15) with a slight turn from ist retaining catch and withdraw from filter housing (9).  Clean filter element (15) in white spirit or paraffin oil.  Replace filter element (15) if it is damaged.  Check seals (10 and 14) and replace, if required.  Re-assemble the filter element in reverse order.  Check for leaks after putting the filter into operation.

Fig. 3-92:

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Shut off the engines.

Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The filter housings themselves may also be hot.

Avoid skin contact.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping hydraulic oil and discard without polluting the environment.

Fig. 3-93:

Replacing the filter elements  Detach the filter element as described under "Checking the filter elements".  Clean filter housing (9, Fig. 3-93:) and the sealing faces at the filter head with white spirit or paraffin oil.  Insert new filter element into filter housing (9) and refit to the filter head with new, lightly oiled sealing rings (10 and 14) and a new retaining ring (13).

Check high-pressure filter for leaks after putting it into operation.

3-84

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing High-pressure filters for the servo circuit The hydraulic shovel is equipped with two highpressure filters (Fig. 3-94:) for the servo circuit.

Both filters are located between the pump gears.

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions".

Checking/cleaning the filter elements  Remove filter housing (5, Fig. 3-95:)and pour out used oil.  Withdraw filter element (6) from filter housing (5).  Check seals (7 and 8) and replace, if required  Clean filter housings and sealing faces at filter head with white spirit or paraffin oil.  Insert new filter element into filter housing (5) and refit to filter head with a new, lightly oiled sealing ring (8).

Check the high-pressure filter for leaks after putting it into operation.

Fig. 3-94:

Shut off the engines.

Risk of scalding from hot hydraulic oil.

The filter housings may also be hot.

Avoid skin contact.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury.

Wear protective gloves and firm protective clothing.

Collect escaping hydraulic oil and discard without polluting the environment.

Fig. 3-95:

Replacing the filter elements  Detach the filter elements as described under "Checking the filter elements".  Install new filter element (6, Fig. 3-95:) and reassemble with new, lightly oiled sealing rings (7) and (8).

Check the high-pressure filter for leaks after putting it into operation.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-85

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing High-pressure filters for pumpflushing circuit The hydraulic shovel has a high-pressure filter for each flushing circuit (2, Fig. 3-96:). The filters are located above the distributor gearboxes.

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions".

Checking/cleaning the filter elements  Remove filter housing (5,Fig. 3-97: )and pour out used oil.  Withdraw filter element (6) from filter housing (5).  Check seals (7 and 8) and replace, if required  Clean filter housings and sealing faces at filter head with white spirit or paraffin oil.  Insert new filter element into filter housing (5) and refit to filter head with a new, lightly oiled sealing ring (8).

Check the high-pressure filter for leaks after putting it into operation.

Fig. 3-96:

Shut off the engines.

Risk of scalding from hot hydraulic oil.

The filter housings may also be hot.

Avoid skin contact.

Fig. 3-97:

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury.

Replacing the filter elements

Wear protective gloves and firm protective clothing.

Collect escaping hydraulic oil and discard without polluting the environment.

 Detach the filter elements as described under "Checking the filter elements".  Install new filter element (6, Fig. 3-95:) and reassemble with new, lightly oiled sealing rings (7 and 8).

Check the high-pressure filter for leaks after putting it into operation.

3-86

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing High-pressure filters for feeding circuits and swing pumps The hydraulic shovel has four high-pressure filters (Fig. 3-98:) for the feeding circuits of the swing pumps. Two high-pressure filters each are installed beside the pump transfer gearbox.

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions".

Checking/cleaning the filter element  Unscrew drain plug (11, Fig. 3-99:) and drain the hydraulic oil from the filter housing (9).  Remove filter housing (9).  Withdraw filter element (15) from filter housing (9).  Clean filter housing (9) and sealing faces at filter head with white spirit or paraffin oil.  Insert new filter element into filter housing (9) and refit to filter head with a new, lightly oiled sealing ring (14).

Check the high-pressure filter for leaks after putting it into operation.

Fig. 3-98:

Shut off the engines.

Risk of scalding from hot hydraulic oil.

The filter housings may also be hot.

Fig. 3-99:

Avoid skin contact.

Replacing the filter elements

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury.

 Detach the filter elements as described under "Checking the filter elements".

Wear protective gloves and firm protective clothing.

Collect escaping hydraulic oil and discard without polluting the environment.

 Install new filter element (15, Fig. 3-99:) and re-assemble with a new, lightly oiled sealing ring (14).

Check the high-pressure filter for leaks after putting it into operation.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-87

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing High-pressure filters for swing circuit The hydraulic shovel has one high-pressure filter (Fig. 3-100:) for each of the six swing circuits.

Checking/cleaning the filter elements The filter elements are only to be cleaned/changed if necessary.

Fig. 3-101: Fig. 3-100:

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions".

Shut off the engines.

Risk of scalding from hot hydraulic oil.

The filter housings may also be hot.

Avoid potentially harmful skin contact with hydraulic oil.

Wear protective gloves and firm protective clothing.

Collect escaping hydraulic oil and discard without polluting the environment.

 Loosen flange (6, Fig. 3-100:).  Unscrew cover (5, Fig. 3-101:).  Withdraw filter element (2) together with sealing ring (3) and retaining ring (4) from housing (1).  Clean filter element (2) with white spirit or paraffin oil.  Insert filter element into filter housing (1) and refit with new, lightly oiled sealing ring (10) and a new retaining ring (4).  Screw cover (5) into housing (1).  Refit flanche (6, Fig. 3-100:) to housing (1).

Check high-pressure filter for leaks after putting it into operation.

3-88

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Changing the hydraulic oil Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions" chapter.

Avoid mixing of different hydraulic fluids (see chapter “Avoid mixing of different hydraulic fluids” for more information).

Shut off the engines.

Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The hydraulic oil reservoir itself may also be hot.

Avoid skin contact.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping oil and discard without polluting the environment.

Do not start up the drive engines when the hydraulic oil reservoir is empty. The hydraulic pumps may be destroyed if they are allowed to run dry.

Avoid mixing of different hydraulic fluids The machine has been run in at the factory with BM Long Term Hydraulic Fluid HSS (Part-No. 2482971). Bucyrus HEX recommends using this high-grade hydraulic fluid also in operation as it has been made especially for use in these machines to which it is also perfectly adapted.

If oil analyses are performed regularly and with positive results, the BM Long Term Hydraulic Fluid can remain in the machine for up to 10 000 operating hours.

If an alternative hydraulic fluid is to be used, it must fulfil the same specifications. Please note that the change interval for alternative fluids is fixed at 5 000 operating hours.

There is an increased risk of damage to hydraulic components, if different hydraulic fluids are mixed during topping up as well as when changing over to a fluid of a different type or from another manufacturer.

For topping up, it is therefore necessary to use only same hydraulic fluid as the one that is already in the hydraulic system.

When changing over to an alternative hydraulic fluid, please observe that there is always a small amount of old fluid remaining in the hydraulic system even after the system has been emptied. The mixing of this residual amount of old fluid with the new alternative fluid reduces the properties of the fluid dramatically and can cause damage to components of the hydraulic system in operation.

To avoid this result, the change-over to the alternative fluid must be performed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's prescriptions. The manufacturer must confirm that his hydraulic fluid is compatible with the BM Long Term Hydraulic Fluid.

The remaining amount of old fluid must not exceed 2% of the total volume. This can only be achieved by repeated flushing with the total fluid volume.

If the remaining amount of fluid exceeds 2% of the total volume, the fluid becomes a detrimental "mixed fluid".

The operation of the system with mixed fluids must by all means be avoided.

Bucyrus HEX assumes no warranty for damage caused as a result of the machine having been operated with consumables of inappropriate specification or with mixed fluids.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-89

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Drawing off hydaulic oil The hydraulic oil can also be drawn off through the service station (Fig. 3-102:).  Bring hydraulic oil to operating temperature (ca. 50° C / 122°F).

 Drain off hydraulic oil as described under "Draining off the hydraulic oil".  Remove cap (3, Fig. 3-103:)..  Detach the return-flow filter.

 Retract hydraulic cylinders as far as possible and stand working equipment on the ground.  Shut off the engines.  Unscrew cap of express coupling (10).  Connect hose line of the service vehicle.

The hose line and its use are described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid change" section.

Fig. 3-103:

 Place a collecting recipient for the flushing oil under the drain plug (1, Fig. 3-104:) of the hydraulic oil reservoir.  Unscrew drain plug (1).

Fig. 3-102:

 Remove hose line. The coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.

 Clean the inside of the hydraulic oil reservoir with diesel fuel or flushing oil.

Remove all sediments and also the residues of the cleaning agent thoroughly  Refit cap (3, Fig. 3-103:).

Cleaning the hydraulic oil reservoir Explosion hazard.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions" chapter.

Shut off the engines.

Do not use white spirit, paraffin oil or other solvents for cleaning.

Use diesel fuel or a special flushing oil.

Avoid skin contact.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury.

Fig. 3-104:

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Dispose of contaminated hydraulic oil without polluting the environment and separately from other waste.

3-90

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Filling in hydraulic oil Hydraulic oil is filled by means of the service station (Fig. 3-105:).

 The oil level is also displayed on the BCSscreen (Fig. 3-107:).  Vent the hydraulic system.  Check the oil level in the hydraulic oil reservoir. Top up with oil, if required.  Unscrew the hose line. The express coupling closes automatically.  Screw protective cap back in place.

Fig. 3-105:

 Unscrew cap of express coupling (10).  The use of the hose line is described under "hose line for oil and cooling-lequid changes".

Connect filling hose express coupling of the service vehicle. Fill in hydraulic oil until the oil level lies between the “min” and the “max” marks of the decals (2) beside the inspection glass (1, Fig. 3-106:). (oil grade cf. "LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES").

Fig. 3-107:

Hydraulic oil can also be filled in through the return-flow filter.  Remove cover (3, Fig. 3-108:).  Before fitting the cover (3), check the sealing ring and replace, if damaged.  Install cover.

Fig. 3-106:

Fig. 3-108:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-91

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Venting the hydraulic system Hydraulic pumps, hydraulic motors, hydraulic cylinders, travel brake valves, suction lines of hydraulic pumps, oil cooler manifolds and the servo control system must be vented 

after assembly on site and prior to initial commissioning,



before each recommissioning of the hydraulic shovel, e.g. after extensive repair work to the hydraulic system or after prolonged downtimes,



after each hydraulic oil change,



after replacement of hoses or lines.

Fig. 3-110:

Venting the hydraulic components 

Always admit oil first to that side of the cylinder where the piston (2) is. This is

Hydraulic pumps and hydraulic motors (with electric motors shut off).

• the piston-side port (3) when the piston rod is retracted (1, Fig. 3-109:),

Open the highest leakage oil port and fill in clean hydraulic oil up to the lower edge of the opening.

• the rod-side port (4) when the piston rod is extended (1, Fig. 3-110:).

Check the hydraulic system under load. Pay attention to noises produced by the hydraulic pump or the hydraulic motors. Abrupt movements of the working equipment are a sign of entrapped air in the system. Remaining air pockets can be eliminated by actuating all hydraulic functions. 

Hydraulic cylinder Before the initial admission of the cylinder with oil, the piston must be in either of the two extreme piston positions. In other words, the piston rod (1, Fig. 3-109: and Fig. 3-110:) must be either completely retracted or completely extended.

If, for assembly reasons, the piston rod is inmiddle position, admit oil first to the piston-side port (4).

When oil is admitted for the first time to the cylinder, the oil flow must be reduced. Therefore extend or retract the piston rod as slowly as possible.

The screws/nozzles of the following components must be opened until oil emerges bubble-free from the opening: Always vent only the system section that has been opened.



the travel brake valve at the venting screw,



the oil cooler manifold at the mini-measuring ports,



the servo system at the venting screws of the control blocks (under the servo caps),



the intake line at the venting screw (with drive motors stationary).

Fig. 3-109:

3-92

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Cleaning the hydraulic oil cooler Risk of injury from rotating cooler fan blades.

Cleaning The hydraulic oil coolers are located in the oil cooler module.

Clean the hydraulic oil coolers at regular intervals.  Shut off the engines.

Shut off the engines.

 Remove any accumulated dirt.

Never start cleaning work until the cooler fan blades have stopped turning.

 Clean the fan blades (2).

The hydraulic oil coolers reach the same temperature as the hydraulic oil. Risk of burning.

 Clean the radiators with a jet of water or compressed air from outside to inside.

Allow the hydraulic oil cooler to cool down.

 Leave hydraulic oil coolers to dry.

Wear protective gloves and firm protective clothing.

 Check the hydraulic motors (1) for free movement.

If the machine is used in places with heavily contaminated ambient air, the hydraulic oil coolers must be cleaned more often than specified in the servicing plan.

In winter-time, check that the fans (2) turn freely and that the cooling fins are free from ice and snow.

The speed of the fan motors (1, Fig. 3-111:) are thermostat-controlled. The fan motors run at maximum speed when the hydraulic oil temperature reaches ca. 60°C / 140°F.

Fig. 3-111:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-93

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Electronic excavator control Joystick At regular intervals acc. to the maintenance plans:  Loosen gaiter and move upwards.  Apply a thin layer of low temperature grease on the control spools, the actuator plate above and the cardan joint of the joysticks (arrows, Fig. 3-112:) to prevent jamming of the joysticks.

Pedal At regular intervals acc. to the maintenance plans:  Remove old grease and dirt from the control spools and the actuator plate of the pedals (arrows, Fig. 3-113:).  Apply a thin layer of low temperature grease on the control spools of the pedals to prevent jamming of the control spools.

 Refit gaiter using a cable strap.

Fig. 3-113:

Fig. 3-112:

3-94

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Pressure accumulator - Emergency lowering To permit the working equipment to be lowered in an emergency, the machine is equipped with a pressure accumulator (1, Fig. 3-114:).

The pressure accumulator (1) is located in the superstructure and is accessible from the ground.

Extract from the German regulations The accumulator vessel must not be subjected to welding, soldering or any other mechanical work.

Work on systems containing accumulators (repairs, connection of pressure gauges or similar work) may be carried out only when the fluid pressure has been released

Extract from the German acceptance regulations Hydraulic accumulators are pressure vessels and are therefore subject to the "Druckbehälterverordnung (DruckbehV)" [Pressure Vessel Regulations].

Their installation, equipment and operation are governed by the "Technische Regeln Druckbehälter (TRB)" [Technical Rules for Pressure Vessels]. The pressure vessels of hydraulic accumulators are classified by the admissible operating pressure p in bars, the capacity l in liters and the product of pressure and capacity p x l. Depending on the class to which the accumulator belongs, the following inspections are mandatory: Checking the gas charging pressure in the pressure accumulator

Fig. 3-114:

Pressure-accumulator inspection regulations The following regulations are applicable only in Germany. Please observe the relevant regulations in force in your own country.

Group II p ≥ l bar and p·x l ≤ 200

After commissioning (new installation or repair), the gas charging pressure in the pressure vessel must be checked at least once during the first week. If no pressure loss is detected, the second pressure test must be performed after ca. 3 months. If no pressure loss is detected in this test either, the testing interval can be fixed at once pressure test each year.

Inspections prior to commissioning at the factory at the place of use Pressure testing Inspection certificate Prototype and pressure test (Check of correctness and certified by the manufacturer correct installation) issued by an expert

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Regular inspections Inspection schedule to be drawn up by end user, based on experience with type of operation and fluid.

3-95

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing PUMP TRANSFER GEARBOX Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions.

Changing the gearbox oil Drawing off oil The gearbox oil is drained with the service station (Fig. 3-116:) through 

express coupling (4) for the lefthand pump transfer gearbox,



express coupling (5) for the righthand pump transfer gearbox.

Shut off the engines.

The gearbox housings may be hot, too.

Secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Protect the skin from contact with gearbox oil.

Skin contact with cooling liquid is a potential health hazard.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Checking the gearbox oil level / Topping up with oil Park the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section.  Pull out dipstick (1, Fig. 3-115:), wipe and push in again.  Pull out dipstick (1) a second time.Oil level should lie between the two dipstick markers.

Top up with oil if required.  Push in dipstick (1) again.

Fig. 3-116:

 Unscrew cap of express coupling and connect hose line of the service vehicle.

The hose line and its use are described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid change" section.  Remove hose after the oil has been drawn off.

The coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.

Fig. 3-115:

3-96

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Filling in oil The gearbox oil is filled in with the service station (Fig. 3-117:) through 

express coupling (4) for the lefthand pump transfer gearbox



express coupling (5) for the righthand pump transfer gearbox

Fig. 3-118:

Oil can also be filled in through the bore of the breather valve (2, Fig. 3-119:)

Fig. 3-117:

 Unscrew cap of express coupling and connect hose line of the service vehicle.

The hose line and its use are described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid change" section.

The oil level must reach the upper mark on dipstick (1,Fig. 3-118:).  Remove hose after the oil has been filled in.

The coupling closes automatically.

Fig. 3-119:

 Screw on protective cap.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-97

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Gearbox venting

Pre-chambers

The gearbox is vented through breather valve (2, Fig. 3-120:).

Check oil level

Clean breather valve (2) in accordance with the servicing plan.  Unscrew breather filter (2), clean with white spirit or paraffin oil and blow dry with compressed air.  Screw breather filter (2) back in place.

The oil level in the pre-chambers is visually at the inspection glas (3, Fig. 3-121:) in expansion reservoir (1).

Check the oil level in the pre-chambers regulary.

The oil level should reach up at least to the middle of the inspection glas (3). Top up with gearbox oil, if required.

The pre-chambers are vented through breather valves (2).

Clean breather valve (2) in accordance with the servicing plan.  Unscrew breather filter (2), clean with white spirit or paraffin oil and blow dry with compressed air.  Screw breather filter (2) back in place.

Fig. 3-120:

Fig. 3-121:

3-98

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Pump transfer gearbox lube oil filters

Filter element (5) must be changed after having been cleaned 8 - 10 times; at the latest however, after 1000 operating hours.

Check filter tell-tales (1, Fig. 3-122:) regulary - at operating temperature - for indication of contamination.

If the red sector is visible through transparent cap (2), the filter element must be cleaned or changed.

Fig. 3-123:

Fig. 3-122:

 Remove flange (3, Fig. 3-123:).  Pour oil out of filter pot (4) and remove filter element (5).  Clean filter element in spirits or petroleum;  change if damaged  Clean filter head (6, Fig. 3-122:) and filter pot (4). Check o-ring (7, Fig. 3-123:) for damage; change if necessary.  Oil the o-ring lightly. Place filter element into filter pot and re-assemly.  Check filters for leakages after recommencing operation.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-99

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing SWING GEARBOX Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions.

Shut off the engines.

The gearbox housings may be hot, too.

Secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Protect the skin from contact with gearbox oil.

Gearbox - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil  Park the machine as described under "Securing the machine".  Screw out dipstick (1, Fig. 3-124:) and wipe clean.  Insert dipstick (1) fully again (do not screw in) and withdraw a second time.

Skin contact with cooling liquid is a potential health hazard.

The oil level must reach up at least to the lower mark on dipstick (1). Top up with gearbox oil, if required.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

 Screw dipstick (1) back in place.

Fig. 3-124:

3-100

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Changing the gearbox oil  Prepare a collecting recipient for used oil.

Choose the required capacity in accordance with the "Refilling quantities - Oil" table.

Fig. 3-126:

Fig. 3-125:

Gearbox venting

Draining off oil

The gearbox is vented through breather filter (2, Fig. 3-126:).

Clean breather filter in accordance with the servicing plan.

 Attach hose (8, Fig. 3-125:) to drain valve (7) and drain off oil completely.

The use of the oil draining hose is described in the "Draining hose for oil changes" chapter.

The drain valve (7, Fig. 3-125:) is accessible from the undercarriage.  Remove hose. The oil drain valve closes automatically.for oil and cooling liquid change" section.

 Unscrew breather filter (2), clean in white spirit or paraffin oil and blow dry with compressed air.  Screw breather filter (2) back in place.

Filling in new oil / Topping up  Unscrew plug (4, Fig. 3-126:) and fill in new oil.  Check oil level with dipstick (1, Fig. 3-126:).  Screw in plug (4) again.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-101

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing TRAVEL GEARBOX Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions.

Travel gearbox - Changing the oil Draining off oil Park the machine as described under "Securing the machine".

Shut off the engines.

The gearbox housings may be hot, too.

Secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Protect the skin from contact with gearbox oil.

Skin contact with cooling liquid is a potential health hazard.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Gearbox - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil Park the machine as described under "Securing the machine".  The oil level must be visible in the level gauge (4, Fig. 3-127:); top up with gearbox oil if necessary.

Fig. 3-128:

 Move the hydraulic shovel until the screw plugs (1, 2 and 3, Fig. 3-128:) are in the position shown in the diagram: 

screw plug (1) in horizontal position



screw plug (2) in bottom position



screw plug (3) at ca. 23° from horizontal (2 o'clock position).

 Place a collecting recipient for used oil under the main gearbox. Choose the required capacity in accordance with the "Refilling quantities Oil" table.  Unscrew plug (2) and drain off oil completely.

Slackening plug (3) allows the oil to run out more readily.  Clean plugs (2 and 3).

Fig. 3-127:

3-102

 Screw in plug (2).

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Preliminary gearbox - Draining off oil  Place a collecting recipient for used oil under the preliminary gearbox. Choose the required capacity in accordance with the "Refilling quantities - Oil" table.  Unscrew plug (5, Fig. 3-129:) and drain off oil completely.  Clean plug (5) and screw back in place.

Pre-chamber - Draining off oil  Place a collecting recipient for used oil under the pre-chamber. Choose the required capacity in accordance with the "Refilling quantities Oil" table.  Unscrew plugs (1, Fig. 3-131:), clean, and screw back into place.

Pre-chamber - Filling in oil  Unscrew plugs (2, Fig. 3-131:) and overflow (3).  Fill in oil through the opening of the overflow (3) until it flows out of the opening of the plug (2).

Fig. 3-129:

Main and preliminary gearbox - Filling in oil  Move the hydraulic shovel until the screw plugs (1 and 3, Fig. 3-130:) are in the positions shown in the diagram:  Unscrew plugs (1 and 3). Fill in oil through opening in plug (3) until it flows out of opening in plug (1) or the oil level is visible in the level gauge (4, Fig. 3-129:).

Fig. 3-131:

If oil emerges from the overflow (3, Fig. 3-131:), the external sealing of the driving motor must be checked.

Fig. 3-130:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-103

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing CRAWLER TRACKS Cleaning Clean tracks, track and support rollers, sprockets and idlers regularly and whenever required. Cleaning is especially important in winter to prevent 

the tracks from being thrown off



oil from leaking out of track and support rollers, sprockets and idlers



excessive wear



the track from breaking.

To clean the tracks:  raise one side of the hydraulic shovel with the working equipment and allow track to turn;  clean the side member supporting the track;  clean track and support rollers (1 and 2, Fig. 3-132:) thoroughly;  clean the sliding planes on the idler guides.

Fig. 3-132:

3-104

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Track roller fastening

Track tensioner

Check fastening screws (4 Fig. 3-133:) regularly for tightness:

Design

 Tighten screws with a torque wrench to the prescribed tightening torque (see "Technical Handbook")

Fig. 3-133:

Support roller fastening Check fastening screws (3, Fig. 3-133:) regularly for tightness Tighten screws with a torque wrench to the prescribed tightening torque (see "Technical Handbook").

The tracks are tensioned with the help of the hydraulic pressure created during travelling. Fig. 3-134: and Fig. 3-136: show parts of the tracks and the tensioner:

Fig. 3-134:

Pos. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Function Crawler track Support roller Drive sprocket Track roller Pressure cylinder Idler Mini - measuring port Pressure limiting valve Pressure accumulator

Fig. 3-135:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-105

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Techncal data Track tensioning pressure Pressure limiting valve Gas pressure in pressure accumulator (nitrogen filling pressure)

ca. 90 bars / 1305psi 400 bars / 5800psi 72 bars / 1044psi

Function The tensioning system is under permanent pressure of ca. 72 bars / 1044psi which keeps both tracks permanently tensioned. Pressure losses are compensated as soon as the engines have been started. Retensioning is not required.

For cleaning and servicing work, the tracks can be slackened.

To do so:  Stop the engines.  Open both pressure limiting valves (8, Fig. 3-136:) to slacken the tracks.  After the work, screw down the pressure limiting valves (8) to the limit stop.

Fig. 3-136:

The pressure-limiting valves (8) are preset to a pressure of 400 bars / 5800psi and sealed in this position. The lead seal must not be removed and the pressure setting of 400 bars / 5800psi must not be changed.

The track tensioners are maintenance-free.

3-106

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Pressure-accumulator inspection regulations The following regulations are applicable only in Germany. Please observe the relevant regulations in force in your own country.

Extract from the German regulations The accumulator vessel must not be subjected to welding, soldering or any other mechanical work.

Work on systems containing accumulators (repairs, connection of pressure gauges or similar work) may be carried out only when the fluid pressure has been relieved.

Extract from the German acceptance regulations Hydraulic accumulators are pressure vessels and are therefore subject to the "Druckbehälterverordnung (DruckbehV)" [Pressure Vessel Regulations].

Their installation, equipment and operation are governed by the "Technische Regeln Druckbehälter (TRB)" [Technical Rules for Pressure Vessels]. The pressure vessels of hydraulic accumulators are classified by the admissible operating

pressure p in bars, the capacity l in liters and the product of pressure and capacity p x l. Depending on the class to which the accumulator belongs, the following inspections are mandatory:

Checking the gas charging pressure in the pressure accumulator After commissioning (new installation or repair), the gas charging pressure in the pressure vessel must be checked at least once during the first week. If no pressure loss is detected, the second pressure test must be performed after ca. 3 months. If no pressure loss is detected in this test either, the testing interval can be fixed at once pressure test each year.

The above-mentioned pressure tests are required to ensure the functioning of the track tensioner.

They are no substitute for the inspections as required by the "Pressure Vessel Regulations".

Before checking the gas charging pressure (nitrogen filling pressure) in the pressure accumulator, the track must first be slackened, i.e. the hydraulic part of the tensioning system must be depressurized. See under "Function".

Tab. 3-1

Group IV p ≥ l bar p·x l ≥ 1000

Inspections prior to commissioning at the factory at the place of use Preliminary inspection by an Acceptance inspection by an expert expert Prototype and pressure test certified by the manufacturer (type approval) or the expert

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Regular inspections Internal inspection: every 10 years for noncorrosive fluids; otherwise pressure testing every 5 years: every 10 years by an expert

3-107

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing SWING RING Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions.

Internal gearing The internal gearing (1, Fig. 3-138:) and the pinion (2) are enclosed in a housing (3, Fig. 3-139:). The housing forms a grease-filled trough in which the pinion of the swing mechanism moves.

Shut off the engines.

Wear protective gloves and firm protective clothing.

Swing ring - Instructions The grease filling must be replaced: 

when repairs have been carried out on the swing ring, the swing ring seals or the swing ring housing.

Remove old grease completely before filling in new grease.

If greater losses are detected, locate cause immediately to prevent damage to the swing ring.

Greases and greasy cleaning rags must not be allowed to pollute the environment. Discard grease and greasy cleaning rags separately from other waste without polluting the environment.

The grease is pumped to the greasing port of the grease trough by the distributor (Fig. 3-137:). The amount of grease used up during operation is replenished by the central lubricating system.

Bearing races

The housings have a check opening which is closed with a cover (2, Fig. 3-139:For checking, the cover must be removed.

Fig. 3-138:

The central lubricating system supplies grease continuously to the two roller bearing races and the internal gearing .

The grease is pumped to the greasing points of the bearing races by a distributor (Fig. 3-137:).

Fig. 3-139:

Fig. 3-137:

3-108

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Swing ring - Checking the grease filling Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions.

Swing ring - Filling in grease Prior to initial commissioning, the grease trough of the internal gearing must be filled with grease.

Add grease when:

Shut off the engines Wear protective gloves and firm protective clothing.

At regular intervals:  check internal gearing and teeth of swing mechanism pinion for condition,



the housing has been replaced,



old grease has been removed in the course of other work.

Always fill in fresh grease by hand.

Risk of accidents. Never swing the superstructure when refilling grease.

 check that the grease filling is sufficient.

The housing must always contain enough grease for the gearing - measured from its lower edge - to run in at least 20 mm / 0.79" of grease over its whole circumference (Fig. 3-140:).

In the event of greater grease losses, eliminate cause immediately and add grease to prevent the internal gearing and the pinion from being damaged by continued swing movements.

Swing ring - Checking the screws for tightness The fastening screws of the swing ring in the superstructure and the undercarriage are tightened with their respective check torque torque (see: "Technical Handbook").

When these values are reached, the fastening screws are perfectly tight.

Loosen slack screws before tightening them with a torque wrench to the prescribed torque (see: "Technical Handbook").

Fig. 3-140:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-109

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing CENTRAL LUBRICATING Design The hydraulic shovel is equipped with an automatic central lubricating system which provides grease regularly to all greasing points except those mentioned in the "Lubricating chart - Grease".

The central lubricating system is activated when the electrical system is switched on with the keyswitch and at least one engine is running.

All greasing points connected to the system are greased at regular intervals.

The automatic greasing is interrupted when the engines are stopped with the idle timers.

The central lubricating system is controlled electrohydraulically by the PLC (Programmable logical controller).

The PLC is located in a switch box underneath the cab.

Fig. 3-142:

If a fault occurs, BCS gives a warning on the screen (Fig. 3-142:). This happens, for example, if the filter element in the hydraulic line is contaminated.

If one of the following faults occurs, BCS gives a warning and at the same time the grease pump is switched off: 

Grease container is empty,



Greasing pressure in the grease lines is below 250 bars (3626psi).

In this cases, BCS switches off the hydraulic function of the shovel/backhoe cylinders after 15 minutes. This prevents damages from lack of greasing.

Inform the responsible maintenance personnel immediately.

Keep on working after the fault has been fixed.

Fig. 3-141:

After the fault has been fixed, actuate the "Reset" button in the control column (64, Fig. 3-141:) or the “Reset” button in the control box located at the grease container. The buttons must be actuated for at least one second.

For further information on the function and setting refer to the Technical Handbook, chapters 9 and 11.

3-110

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Function The two grease pumps (1 and 2, Fig. 3-143:) pump grease through the greasing lines to the main grease distributors of the superstructure.

Pump (1) supports the greasing points on the uppercarriage and working equipment.

Pump (2) supports the undercarriage greasing system (optional).

As soon as the grease container is empty, the BCS (Fig. 3-144:) gives a warning signal.

In the event of a fault, the "dumping" function is switched off automatically after 15 min.

Work can be continued when the grease container is filled with grease.

The control elements of the lubricating system are installed on the panel (3).

Fig. 3-144: Fig. 3-143:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-111

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Filling up the grease container

Breather filter

Fill up the grease container through the service station (Fig. 3-145:).

Check/change the breather filter at regular intervals acc. to the maintenance plans.

The use of the hose is described in the chapter "Hose for oil and cooling liquid changes"

 Unscrew wing nut that fixes the cover (10, Fig. 3-146:).

 Switch on the display system with toggle switch (23, Fig. 3-145:), lamp (22) lights up.

 Withdraw cover (7, Fig. 3-147:) and filter element (8).

 Unscrew the cap of the express coupling (11).

 Check filter element. Replace if necessary.

 Connect the filling hose of the service vehicle.

 Re-install breather filter.

 Fill in grease.  When the grease container is full, the monitoring lamp (24) lights up.  Remove the flexible hose.

The express coupling closes automatically.  Refit the protective cap.  Switch off display system with toggle switch (23), lamp (22) is off.

Fig. 3-146:

Fig. 3-145:



Fig. 3-147:

3-112

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Checking the greasing pressure Check every week, whether the hydraulic oil pressure indicated by pressure gauge (3, Fig. 3-146:) is 60 bars / 870psi (the pressure is depending on temperature and viscosity of the oil and may vary).

In the event of deviating pressure values, shut off the engines and check the central greasing system.

Lower oil pressure means that not all of the greasing points are supplied with grease.

Higher oil pressure may cause bursting of a greasing line.

Always refill the grease container in time to avoid air from penetrating into the greasing system. Air in the greasing may cause malfunctions.

Unblocking a grease line

Fig. 3-148:

The necessary greasing pressure of 320 bars for the superstructure and 180 bars for the undercarrige is generated by means of a pressure translator.

Put the hydraulic shovel back into operation only after the lubricating system works properly and after having actuated the unloaded working equipment for abt. 5 minutes. This is necessary in order to supply sufficient amounts of grease to the cylinder bearings.

The greasing pressure for the superstructure is indicated by pressure gauge (2, Fig. 3-148:), the greasing pressure for the undercarriage by the pressure gauge (1).

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-113

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Oilfilter for hydraulic circuit grease pump replace

Replacing the filter element Change filter element regulary and when the BCS indicates a contamination.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions" chapter.

Shut off the engines.

Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The filter housings may also be hot.

Avoid skin contact.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

For filtering of the hydraulic oil, high pressure filter (arrow, Fig. 3-149:).is installed in the pumping line.

Fig. 3-150:

 Unscrew filter housing (5, Fig. 3-150:).  Withdraw filter element (6) from filter housing (5).  Clean filter housing (5) and the sealing face at the filter head (9) with white spirit or paraffin oil.  Insert new filter element into filter housing (5) and refit to the filter head with new, lightly oiled sealing ring (8).  Check for leaks after putting the filter into operation.

Fig. 3-149:

3-114

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Grease filter replace (Filling the grease container) Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing –Safety instructions" chapter.

Checking the filter element  Unscrew filter housing (5, Fig. 3-152:).  Withdraw filter element (3) from housing (5).  Remove the grease.  Clean filter housing and contact faces at the filter head with white spirit or paraffin oil.

Shut off the engines.

 Check seals (4) and replace, if required.

Grease filter (13, Fig. 3-151:) is installed in the grease filling line to the grease container.

 Insert filter element into housing (5) and attach to the filter head (1) with a new, slightly oiled sealing ring (2).  Check the high-pressure filter for leaks after the system has been put into operation.

Fig. 3-151:

Fig. 3-152:

Replacing the filter element  Remove filter element as described under "Checking the filter element".  Check seals (4) and replace, if required.  Insert new filter element and reassemble.  Check high-pressure filter for leaks after the system has been put into operation.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-115

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Grease filter replace (Grease lines) Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing –Safety instructions" chapter.

Checking the filter element  Unscrew filter housing (5, Fig. 3-154:).  Withdraw filter element (3) from housing (5).  Remove the grease.  Clean filter housing and contact faces at the filter head with white spirit or paraffin oil.

Shut off the engines.

 Check seals (4) and replace, if required.

Grease filters are installed in the greasing lines to superstructure and working equipment (2, Fig. 3-153:) and to undercarriage greasing system (1, optional).

 Insert filter element into housing (5) and attach to the filter head (1) with a new, slightly oiled sealing ring (2).  Check the high-pressure filter for leaks after the system has been put into operation.

Fig. 3-153: Fig. 3-154:

Replacing the filter element  Remove filter element as described under "Checking the filter element".  Check seals (4) and replace, if required.  Insert new filter element and reassemble.  Check high-pressure filter for leaks after the system has been put into operation.

3-116

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing OTHER MAINTENANCE Engine Information about maintenance can be found in the engine operating instructions.

Further servicing works not described are carried out by the Bucyrus HEX Service or the engine manufacturer.

Cleaning Check the engines regularly. 

If the engine is cleaned with a steam-jet cleaner, make sure that the jet is not directed towards electrical components.



If no steam-jet cleaner is available, the engines must be cleaned with suitable cleaning agents (cold cleaners).

Cooling system Check the radiators regularly.  Shut off the engines.  Remove any accumulated dirt.  Clean the fan blades (2, Fig. 3-155:).  Clean the radiators with a jet of water or compressed-air from the outside.  Dry up coolers.  Check free movement of hydraulic motors (1).

Do not clean radiators with a wire brush or similar hard objects.

In case of firmly adhering dirt, remove radiator and clean.

Means of fastening  Check fastening screws regularly for tightness.

The seating planes of the screws must be free from paint, dirt and rust.

Fig. 3-155:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-117

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Cooling system (engine)

Equipment

Check the radiators (1, Fig. 3-156:) regularly.

Check the welded joins of the working equipment regulary.

 Remove any accumulated dirt.  Clean the radiators with a jet of water or compressed-air from the outside.

Inspections must be carried out acc. to the "Structural Inspection Reports" every 500 OH and every 5000 OH. "Structural Inspection Report" forms for those inspections can be downloaded from the Bucyrus HEX website, section "Support, Warranty".

The inside located joins are accessible through the man-holes in stick (arrow, Fig. 3-157:) and boom (arrow, Fig. 3-158:).

Fig. 3-156:

Exhaust system Check the fastening screws regularly for tightness when the exhaust system is cold.

Fig. 3-157:

Fig. 3-158:

3-118

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing LADDERS (OPTIONAL) To allow the hydraulic ladders on both sides of the superstructure (Fig. 3-159:) to be lowered in an emergency, the ladder mechanisms are equipped with pressure accumulators (1, Fig. 3-160:).

The pressure accumulators are located in the superstructure.

Fig. 3-160:

Fig. 3-159:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-119

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing Pressure-accumulator inspection regulations The following regulations are applicable only in Germany. Please observe the relevant regulations in force in your own country.

Extract from the German regulations

Checking the gas charging pressure in the pressure accumulator After commissioning (new installation or repair), the gas charging pressure in the pressure vessel must be checked at least once during the first week. If no pressure loss is detected, the second pressure test must be performed after ca. 3 months. If no pressure loss is detected in this test either, the testing interval can be fixed at once pressure test each year.

The accumulator vessel must not be subjected to welding, soldering or any other mechanical work.

Work on systems containing accumulators (repairs, connection of pressure gauges or similar work) may be carried out only when the fluid pressure has been relieved.

Extract from the German acceptance regulations Hydraulic accumulators are pressure vessels and are therefore subject to the "Druckbehälterverordnung (DruckbehV)" [Pressure Vessel Regulations].

Their installation, equipment and operation are governed by the "Technische Regeln Druckbehälter (TRB)" [Technical Rules for Pressure Vessels]. The pressure vessels of hydraulic accumulators are classified by the admissible operating pressure p in bars, the capacity l in liters and the product of pressure and capacity p x l. Depending on the class to which the accumulator belongs, the following inspections are mandatory:

Group III p ≥ l bar and p·x l ≥ 200 bars p·x l ≤ 1000 bars

3-120

Inspections prior to commissioning at the factory at the place of use Preliminary inspection by an Acceptance inspection by an expert expert Prototype and pressure test certified by the manufacturer (type approval) or the expert

Regular inspections Inspection schedule to be drawn up by end user, based on experience with type of operation and operating fluids.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing ON-BOARD CRANE, DRIVE UNIT The drive unit supplies the crane with hydraulic power. The drive unit comprises the diesel engine, fuel tank, starter batteries and the hydraulic system.

Crane engine More and detailed information about the diesel engine can be found in the Operating and Maintenance Manual for the crane engine.  Before each shift check engine oil level. If necessary top up with engine oil through opening of dipstick (3, Fig. 3-161:).  After each shift fill up fuel tank (1).  Regularly check batteries (4) and cable connections.  Regularly, at least once a year: - change engine oil, - replace engine oil filter, - check / replace air filter (2), - replace fuel filter.

Do not start engine with air filter (2) removed.

Fig. 3-161:

Hydraulic system For more and detailed information, see crane operating instructions.  Prior to each deployment, check the hydraulic oil level at the inspection glass (1, Fig. 3-162:); top up with hydraulic oil if necessary.  Check contamination of hydraulic oil filter regularly at contamination indicator (4).

Fig. 3-162:

 Regularly, but at least once a year replace the hydraulic oil filter (3) and the breather filter (2).

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-121

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing On-board crane, lubricating Servicing work  Lubricate all bearings regularly and as required, and spray swing ring with a graphite spray (Fig. 3-163:) 4 lube points 1 - bearing 2 - joint (column/boom) 2 lube points 3 - cylinder bearing 5 lube points 4 - swing ring Graphite spray

On-Board crane, checking tightness of fastening bolts The hydraulic driven on-board crane (Optional) is fixed on the uppercarriage of the machine by means of 16 fastening bolts. The upper and lower fastening bolts (Fig. 3-164:) are important and safety relevant components, they carry all loads and forces of the crane.

Check tightness of all fastening bolts: 

in regular intervals according to the maintenance plans and



before every start of the on-board crane.

Check tightness of the fastening bolts by means of a torque wrench. The tightening torque for fastening bolts M20, quality 10.9, lightly oiled is: 557 Nm.

Fig. 3-163:

Fig. 3-164:

3-122

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing PUTTING THE HYDRAULIC SHOVEL OUT OF OPERATION AND RECOMMISSIONING Putting the hydraulic shovel out of operation

Battery storage

 Park the hydraulic shovel on firm and level ground.

 Check the acid density and the electrolyte level of the battery every two weeks.

 Set the working equipment down on the ground, retracting the piston rods of the hydraulic cylinders as far as possible.

 Recharge the batteries at the latest, when the acid density has dropped to 1.23 kg/dm³.

 Set all control element to "0".

During prolonged machine downtimes, remove the batteries and store in a dry room at an ambient temperature of ca. 20°C / 68°F. Observe the following points with regard to maintenance:  Clean the batteries.

 Keep the batteries clean and dry on the outside.

 Clean the machine.  Carry out a visual inspection of the hydraulic shovel.  Remove coarse dirt, snow and ice from the fins and fan wheel of the hydraulic oil cooler.  Carry out engines preservation.  Protect all bright metal parts (e.g. piston rods) from rust and dirt.  Check anti-freeze concentration of the cooling liquid to avoid freezing during the cold season.  Fill up the fuel tanks.  Remove the batteries; see: "Battery storage".  Secure the machine against unauthorized starting by: - withdrawing the key from the key-switch, - locking the cab door, - securing all lockable hatches.  Cover up all openings.

Recommissioning  Remove the covers.  Degrease / clean all protected components.  Remove engines preservation in acc. with the engine operationg anstructions.  Check the fuel level in tanks.  Check track tension (visual inspection).  Check level and condition of the cooling liquid in the cooling system.  Check grease filling in grease container.  Oil level

- drive engines, - swing gearboxes, - pump transfer gearboxes, - travel gearboxes.

 Check oil level in hydraulic oil reservoir.  Check battery acid density and level.  Install batteries and reconnect.  Function checks:

- superstructure holding brake, - track brake, - lighting system, - signalling equipment.

 Vent the hydraulic system.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-123

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing

3-124

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing NOTES ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

3-125

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Inspection and servicing

3-126

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work 4 REPAIR WORK Operating instructions

Part 1 INTRODUCTION FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Part 2 OPERATION

Part 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING

Target group

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel Operating personnel The operating personnel must have knowhow relevant to the operation and the application of this or comparable machines.

Inspection and servicing personnel The inspection and servicing personnel must have know-how relevant to the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

Part 4 REPAIR WORK

Repair personnel

Part 5 ANNEX

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 6 INDEX

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

The repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to the repair of this or comparable machines.

4-1

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work

4-2

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work REPAIR WORK - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Dismantling components

Operating instructions

Never do dismantling while the machine is at operating temperature.

Never carry out repair work without having read and understood the operating instructions.

Pay special attention to: "Fundamental Safety Instructions", "Inspection and servicing - safety instructions" and all warnings and safety instructions attached to the machine.

The descriptions of job sequences provide only experienced personnel with the necessary instructions.

The operating manual must be kept with the machine at all times.

Repair personnel

Oils, greases, or coolants may have a high temperature and result in burning or scalding.

Leave time for the machine to cool down.

Before starting work, depressurize piping and hoses, cylinders, radiator, hydraulic tank and other systems or units.

Replace defective components in good time to prevent major damage.

Clean the defective component carefully before dismantling it.

Mark the dismantled parts in the correct sequence to faciliate re-assembly.

Repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to repairing this or comparable machines.

When dismantling the component, close off exposed hose and piping connections, exposed drill holes and housings carefully to prevent any dirt from penetrating.

In the absence of such know-how, meticulous training must be given by experienced repair personnel, e.g. from Bucyrus HEX.

Never remove lead seals

Working in greater heights

Never change rated pressure of pressure relief valves without the explicit authorization of Bucyrus HEX.

Always wear safety harnesses when working at greater heights.

Never remove lead seals from pressure relief valves and accumulators.

Wear an approved safety harness; it must be equipped with fall arresters and safety cables.

Prestressed units Never open defective prestressed units but replace them as an entirety.

In exceptional cases, open only when the system and the operating sequence are precisely known and any special tools required are available.

The operating manual contains no information on this point.

After the repair work To prevent corrosion, coat all bright metal machine parts with a grease film.

On completing the work, re-assemble all protective devices, covers and noise- and vibrationinsulation material.

Never start up the drive engines while work is being done on the machine.

Check the repaired components and all machine functions in a trial run.

Never release the machine for recommissioning until it is fully functioning.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

4-3

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work CONFINED SPACES - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Work in confined spaces can lead to unexpected dangerous situations, such as 

the formation of flammable vapours exploding during welding operations or



the lack of oxygen and harmful gases causing loss of consciousness.

What are "confined spaces"?

Confined spaces on this machine are, for instance, components of the working equipment such as the monoblock boom, the lower part of the boom, the stick or the hydraulic reservoir (Fig. 4-1: - Fig. 4-3:).

These components are provided with manholes.

Manholes offer access to the inside of these components in order to carry out inspections or repairs such as welding work.

Fig. 4-1:

Dangerous situations can also exist in other spaces which are not very often visited or which are badly ventilated. In these spaces, harmful or flammable gases can accumulate unnoticed.

Work in such spaces may only be carried out by specially qualified persons who have been instructed as to the situational risks.

Before visiting these spaces, the following safety precautions must be taken:  The narrow space must be ventilated for a prolonged time, e.g. with a blower. Do not blow oxygen into the space. Oxygen increases the risk of fire.

Fig. 4-2:

 Use your personal protective equipment, e.g. respiratory mask.  Use a safety harness and have a second person stand by with a rescue rope attached to the harness.  Evacuate the gases produced during welding.

Fig. 4-3:

4-4

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work REPAIR WORK, FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD Safety instructions Prior to commencing work, obtain informationon the national and corporate rules for the prevention of accidents and avoiding fires.

Pay particular attention to hazards caused by combustible and easily flammable substances.

Obtain information on the safe handling of the fire extinguishers to be used.

Avoid smoking and open fire on, next to and below the hydraulic shovel.

Even battery gases can ignite in open flames or fire.

Combustible and easily or highly inflammable substances or liquids increase the risk of fire and explosion. This is also valid for pressure vessels containing flammable substances as, for instance, spray oil or cold-starting fluid (ether). They are heat-sensitive and can explode even if exposed only to intensive sunlight.

These substance can also ignite themselves if they come close to hot units or objects as, for instance, a turbocharger.

Do not store these substances on the hydraulic shovel. If combustible, easily or highly flammable substances or liquids were used during maintenance operations, they must be completely removed from the hydraulic shovel at the end of the work.

Place suitable fire guardings (fire barriers) if open fire or flying sparks cannot be avoided during repair work.

If necessary, also cover the ground with fireprotective blankets.

Apply special protection to cables, cable ducts as well as to hose and pipe lines.

Have all your welding, flame cutting and grinding work approved before starting work.

The engine compartment can be equipped with pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether). Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

Protect the pressure vessels against damage before beginning to work in or close to the engine compartment.

Ensure sufficient ventilation.

Do not keep any fire extinguishers that are not suitable or have not been tested.

Do not extinguish flammable liquids with water.

Use: 

dry-powder, carbon-dioxide or foam extinguishing compounds.

When getting into contact with burning substances, the fire-fighting water would abruptly evaporate and distribute the substance such as oil over a wide area. Water causes short-circuits in the electrical system thus possibly entailing new hazards.

Call the fire brigade.

Clean the hydraulic shovel carefully after the maintenance, if oil, grease, fuel, detergents or coldstarting fluid have been spilt over the machine. If possible, use a steam-jet cleaner for cleaning.

Avoid parking the hydraulic shovel in places where 

combustible substances such as coal dust or tar are present.



open or smouldering fire may occur.

Remove the hydraulic shovel from such an area where combustible or easily flammable liquids have spilled from the hydraulic shovel onto the ground.

Flying sparks (caused by welding, flame cutting, grinding, electrical short-circuit) may cause fire on the ground that can spread to the hydraulic shovel.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

4-5

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work REPAIR WORK, ENGINE Read and observe the "Repair - Safety instructions" chapter and the engine operating instructions before working on the engine.

The engine compartment can be equipped with pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether).

Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage. Protect the pressure vessels against damage before beginning to work in or close to the engine compartment.

Risk of injury caused by rotating or hot parts of the engine.

Shut off the engine and allow to cool down.

Carry out repair work only if the machine has been secured as described in the "Securing the machine" section of these operating instructions.

Check and replace V-belts only when the engine is stationary.

4-6

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Repair instructions

Hydraulic hoses – Instructions

Always depressurize the hydraulic system before disconnecting any hydraulic hoses or pipes.

Even hoses that have been properly stored or used are subject to natural ageing. Their useful life is therefore limited.

Read and observe also the chapters "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions" and "Repair Safety instructions".

Replace damaged and leaking hydraulic hoses and pipes as soon as possible by new ones.

Use original spare parts from Bucyrus HEX. They are adapted to the respective function.

Do not re-use old hoses.

Never repair damaged hoses.

Discard escaped oil and oily wastes without polluting the environment. These substances must not be allowed to penetrate into the soil.

Hydraulic hoses must replaced after a service life of six years (including a storage time of 2 years).

Check the date of manufacture on the hose or on the hose fitting regularly.

The recommended interval after which hydraulic hoses - and especially those used in harsh conditions - must be replaced depends on the number of operating hours and on pressure loading.

The use of hoses close to their recommended load limit shortens the replacement interval (e.g. high temperatures, frequent working cycles, extremely high pulse frequencies as well as multi-shift operation and round-the-clock work).

Hydraulic hoses must be replaced, if one of the following defects is detected during a visual inspection:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN



Damage to the outer fibre reinforcement layer reaching down to the inner layer (cuts, chafe marks, cracks).



Embrittlement of the outer fibre reinforcement layer (cracks in the hose material).



Changes in the ususal shape of the hose under pressure or in pressureless condition in bends or curves such as detachment of fibre layers, formation of bubbles or bulges.



Leaks.



Non-observance of fitting requirements.



Damage to or deformation of hose fittings that may result in a reduction of the strength of the screwed union.



Detachment of the hose from the fitting.



Corrosion in fittings reducing the strength of the function of the fitting.

4-7

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work PRESSURE ACCUMULATORS SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The hydraulic system is equipped with pressure accumulators containing nitrogen under high initial pressure.

Even when the hydraulic pressure in the system is reduced, the nitrogen in the accumulator will remain under pressure.

The accumulators are completely safe in operation. If incorrectly handled, however, there is a risk of explosion.

So:  Never handle accumulators never weld or solder.

mechanically,

 Testing and servicing work must be carried out by experts only.  Prior to any testing and servicing work, depressurize the hydraulic part of the system.  To dismantle the accumulator, always wear goggles and working gloves.  Fill accumulator with nitrogen only, never with compressed air or oxygen.  Report any defects or damage to the machine owner without delay.  Prior to recommissioning, an inspection by a specialist or expert is essential if the accumulator was damaged or if the admissible operating temperature or operating pressure was exceeded.

Never remove or paint over warning and information plates, rating plates or type identification markings. Replace illegible or damaged plates immediately

4-8

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work WELDING AND FLAME CUTTING WORKS - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The present safety instructions are valid for both types of work. For easier reading, the text only uses the terms "welding work", "welding" or simply "work". These terms do however always refer to both types of work, i.e. "welding and flame-cutting work".

Read these safety instructions before starting any welding or flame-cutting operations.

Welding work by qualified personnel only Carry out welding work only if you have received special training and if you have been ordered to perform such work.

Always bear in mind that you are performing welding work on heavily loaded components. The quality of your welding work can be decisive for the operational capability of the machine and also for the health and life of persons.

Observe the health protection and accident prevention laws and regulations as well as the fire protection regulations in force in your country.

Observe all warning and instruction signs attached to the machine.

Increased risk of fire during welding work Always bear in mind that the heat, the sparks or dripping red-hot metal or slag produced in the process constitute a considerable risk of fire.

The present safety instructions provide information on how to minimize the risk of fire.

Remove all combustible materials close to the welding location or cover them up with noncombustible materials.

If works in the vicinity of combustible materials cannot be avoided, further persons with firefighting equipment must be present on site as fireguards.

Observe the instructions of the machine owner and of the mine.

Health hazards Welding operations produce harmful gases. Do not inhale the fumes and gases and make sure the surroundings of the welding location are well ventilated or equipped with an exhaust system.

Remove all kinds of paint and all coatings as well as all residues of oils and greases from the weld area.

Do not wind the welding cables round your body or parts of your body. The electromagnetic fields produced may damage your health.

Wear the prescribed personal protective equipment such as:  protective clothing,  protective gloves,  protective mask and,  a fall-arrest system for persons working at height.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

4-9

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work Tanks, pressure vessels and pressure accumulators Any work on vessels containing or having contained  combustible or combustion-accelerating substances,  potentially explosive substances or  substances susceptible to develop harmful gases, fumes, mists or dusts during welding may only be carried out under expert supervision and only by experienced personnel especially assigned to such work.

This prescription applies, for instance, to all tanks and reservoirs for hydraulic fluid, engine oil, diesel fuel or lubricating grease.

Welding work on pressure vessels and pressure accumulators is forbidden.

Pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether) may be installed in or near the engine compartment.

Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

Protect the vessels against damage and high temperatures.

Do not perform welding work in the vicinity of these pressure vessels before they have been covered up safely against accidental contact or flying sparks. Have the pressure vessels removed from the machine, if safe protection cannot be ensured.

Inform yourself about the locations in the machine where the pressure accumulators of the hydraulic system are installed. Do not perform welding work in the vicinity of these pressure accumulators before they have been covered up safely against accidental contact or flying sparks. Have the pressure accumulators removed from the machine, if safe protection cannot be ensured.

Slewing rings and articulated joints The welding current must not flow through ballbearing or roller-bearing slewings rings, through bolted connections or articulated joints or through hydraulic cylinders.

An electric current flowing through an air gap (e.g. in the bearing or in the articulation) produces a spark which damages the metallic surface.

The welding clamps must therefore always be connected very close to the weld area (max. 2 - 3 m away (6.6-9.8 ft)).

Information relating to the electrical system and to electronic modules Electric arc welding produces electromagnetic fields, electrostatic charges and voltage spikes which can cause damage to electronic modules.

Although the electronic modules of the machine are carefully protected against these influences, it is nevertheless necessary to take additional precautions in order to prevent such damage to the greatest possible extent.

•

Switch off the electrical system ("ignition OFF").

•

Open the battery main switch (or disconnect the starter batteries from the machine).

•

Lay the welding cables as far away from electric lines as possible.

If it is not possible to implement all of the abovementioned precautions, all connectors must be removed from the electronic modules before beginning any welding work.

•

Protect withdrawn terminals and connectors from short circuits and soiling. Cover up terminals and connectors with foils or adhesive tape.

•

Never touch the enclosures of electrical and electronic modules with the welding electrode.

•

Protect electric lines against the heat emanating from the weld area.

•

Restore all electrical connections when the welding operations are terminated.

Never connect the ground clamp of the welding cable to the enclosures of electric or electronic modules.

4-10

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work Welding on the counterweight

Welding on the cab

Counterweights may contain a build-up of flammable gases. Before starting to work, counterweights must be flushed for at least 20 minutes with compressed air in order to remove these build-ups of gas. To permit flushing, the counterweight has two bores in its upper part: a threaded bore M18x1.5 for the compressed-air line and another unthreaded bore to let the air out.

The driver's cab is designed in such a way that it meets the FOPS (Falling Objects Protective Structure) requirements in accordance with DIN EN ISO 3449.

Detailed information / instructions on this subject can be found in Service Information 2006-33 which is available on the Bucyrus HEX website under Maintenance & Service.

Welding on components of the working equipment and on other fully or partly closed steel structures Components may be equipped with pipelines routed inside. These lines can contain combustible substances such as hydraulic oil or lubricating grease which may be set on fire by welding operations.

•

Check whether pipes or hosepipes are connected to the steel component.

•

Depressurize these lines.

•

Open the screwed connections and empty the lines routed inside the component.

•

Start welding only after these operations have been carried out.

Welding and other mechanical work is forbidden as there is a risk of reducing the structural stability of the cab.

Further information More detailed information concerning the state-ofthe-art execution of welding operations can be found in the technical handbook "Welding for maintenance and repair".

For problems or queries please contact the competent service personnel.

If parts of the machine have to be removed or dismantled, please read and observe the chapters: "Assembly of working equipment, safety instructions", "Inspection and servicing, safety instructions", "Repair, safety instructions".

Electric lines may also be be laid inside partly open steel structures in order to protect them against damage. They are not always visible from each viewing direction. Electric lines may catch fire as a result of the heat produced during welding.

•

Therefore check carefully whether electric lines are laid in the vicinity of the weld area.

•

Protect electric lines against the heat produced at the weld area or have them removed before starting the welding operations.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

4-11

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work DISPOSAL AT THE END OF THE SERVICE LIFE Dismantling and removal instructions Before beginning work, think about the risks involved, e.g.: 



Risk of deflagrations In the course of time, flammable gases may have formed or accumulated in the hollow spaces of welded constructions, e.g. the counterweight. To remove these flammable gases, the hollow spaces must be purged carefully with compressed air before work with hand grinders, flame cutters or other sparking tools is being undertaken.

Most of the machine components have considerable mass. Therefore use only lifting gear and slings of sufficient bearing capacity.

Risk of fire

Risk of residual pressures still in the hydraulic system. Be very careful when opening hydraulic lines.

Remainders of fuel or oils may lead to the formation of flammable gases in tanks or other hollow spaces. When these tanks or hollow bodies are cut into pieces, the gases may ignite or even explode.

Read the following text attentively and observe the instructions given. Respecting the instructions will help you to protect yourself against health hazards and injuries and to prevent avoidable environment pollution.

For this reason, remove all fuel or oil remainders from these components and purge them carefully with compressed air in order to eliminate flammable gases (other efficient methods of removing flammable gases can also be applied) before work with hand grinders, flame cutters or other sparking tools is being undertaken.

Disposing of the machine without polluting the environment Before stripping down the machine at the end of its service life observe the following instructions: The assemblies of the machine contain various operating fluids or lubricants. These substances may pollute the environment (so-called hazardous substances) and must therefore be disposed of properly.

Observe the national laws and regulations governing the non-polluting disposal of these substances.

Remove all operating fluids from the systems, remove all lubricants and dispose of these substances properly.

4-12



Fuel system: fuel tanks, fuel filters, fuel lines, filling station.

Auxiliary attachment and units, such as an onboard crane or an auxiliary heater have their own fuel tanks with the correpsonding line systems.



Hydraulic oil: hydraulic oil reservoir, hydraulic cylinders, hydraulic motors, hosepipes, piping, hydraulic pumps, hydraulic valves, hydraulic oil filter, filling station.



Engine coolant: engine, radiator, expansion reservoir, piping and hosepipes, filling station.



Gearbox oil in swing, travelling and transfer gearbox systems, expansion tanks, piping and

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work hosepipes, filling station; idlers, support and track rollers.

Further hazardous substances





Batteries contain lead and acid.

Have the refrigerant (R134A) sucked out of the air conditioner system.





Grease from the central lubricating system, grease drum, piping and hosepipes, distributors, filling station; grease accumulations in bearings of the working equipment, grease filling in the swing ring, grease filling in track and support rollers as well as in idlers.

Electronic modules are located in switch cabinets of the cab module, the engine module, the control column.



Pressure accumulators contain nitrogen under high pressure and possibly remainders of hydraulic oil.



Lamps of Xenon working lights contain mercury.

The required electronic control circuits are integrated in the housings of the working lights.



The fluorescent lamps of the maintenance lighting (discharge types) contain mercury.



Insulating material of cables can contain PVC.



The fire extinguishing system (if installed) contains trigger charges (ATTENTION, explosion risk) on the extinguishing agent containers.

Pressure accumulators, extinguishing gas and extinguishing powder.

For more detailed information please refer to the manufacturer's safety datasheets.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

4-13

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work Appropriate disposal of batteries The machine is equipped with batteries containing lead and other harmful and polluting substances.

Damaged or used batteries must therefore not be disposed of in the environment. They must be disposed of properly and separately from other waste.

The batteries are marked with the corresponding symbols (Fig. 1).

Since batteries contain also reusable materials, they are taken back free of charge by the manufacturer, dealer or by other specialized companies.

In the European Community, the final consumer is obliged by law to to dispose of used batteries in designated waste collections centers.

Observe the current regulations and laws of your country with regard to the handling of damaged or used batteries.

4-14

Fig. 4-4:

The symbols in Fig. 4-4: have the following meaning: 

Crossed-out waste bin= Do not dispose of batteries with normal household waste.



Pb……= Chemical symbol for lead.



Circle of bent arrows= Recycling symbol, ingredients of the battery can be reused.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work NOTES .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. ..............................................................................................................................................................................

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

4-15

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Repair work

4-16

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex 5 ANNEX Operating instructions

Target group

Part 1 INTRODUCTION FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 2 OPERATION

Operating personnel The operating personnel must have knowhow relevant to the operation and the application of this or comparable machines.

Part 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING Part 4 REPAIR WORK

Inspection and servicing personnel The inspection and servicing personnel must have know-how relevant to the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

Repair personnel The repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to the repair of this or comparable machines.

Part 5 ANNEX

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 6 INDEX

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-1

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex

5-2

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex BOARD-CONTROL-SYSTEM BCS III, what’s that?

What it is The BCSIII is the third generation of the Board Control System. This generation represents the current stage of development of this reliable monitoring and control system for hydraulic mining shovels from Bucyrus HEX. The BCSIII communicates with other electronic units in the hydraulic shovel and makes up the CAMP system, the Control And Monitoring Platform.

Controllers actuate and monitor functions such as the motor management, drive and control of the hydraulic pumps, the servo control and others. The controllers are basically computers that have been configured for their special application.

Other electronic units of the CAMP system that communicate with the BCSIII are located in cabinets in the module below the driver’s cab, the pump compartment and the engine compartment.

The exchange of data between sensors, controllers, the BCSIII and other involved components takes place via the CAN bus.

What it does The Board Control System, abbreviated to BCS, monitors all the essential functions of the hydraulic shovel and its components.

It releases an appropriate signal if any maximum value is exceeded and also sends a report to be archived in the memory bank.

If a normal operating status can be reached by temporarily reducing the hydraulic shovel 's output, then this is monitored by BCS and done by the CAMP system.

If it is necessary for the operator to take certain action, e.g. to stop one of the engines a relevant command is sent to the BCS display screen.

BCS also gives information on servicing and trouble-shooting.

Sensors installed at various points on the hydraulic shovel constantly transmit their readings to the controllers of the CAMP system.

All essential pieces of operating data are displayed on the BCSIII screen in the form of simulated instruments as well as they are archived and can be called up as and when required.

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Fig. 5-1:

Benefits for the operator Because BCS automatically warns of any abnormal conditions that require a corrective action, the operator can concentrate fully on the work in hand, and is not distracted by constantly having to keep an eye on many instruments or by having to decide upon appropriate actions to be taken in case of limit values being exceeded.

The operator and the servicing crew also have the means of calling up particular background information from the BCS archive.

The housing – installed in the control column inside the driver’s cab (Fig. 5-1:) – integrates the computer, the monitor, the control elements and the interfaces.

Want more information?

More detailed and more technical information for service personnel could be found in the “Technical Handbook”, chapter 9.

There are more extensive information given about the communicating units and about troubleshooting.

5-3

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex The keys on the front side

Other elements on the front side

A membrane keypad is located on the front side of the housing (Fig. 5-2:). The keys can be used to navigate through the screen pages.

(located on top of the column of keys on the right side)

The keys in the row below the screen (1 – 0) will perform the same task as the active area on the screen above.

Example: In (Fig. 5-2:) the key (1) lies directly below the active area "Service". Touching the "Service" area or pressing key "1", will take you to the same screen page.

They can also be used for numerical inputs.

The keys provided with arrows on the right side of the screen are used to navigate in a screen page.

Pressing the key with the "door symbol" gives access to the previous screen page.

The green LED lights up when the electrical system of the machine is switched on, operating voltage is available. The green LED flashes with each keypress and when the background lighting of the screen is turned off.

The yellow LED flashes if the temperature inside the device lies outside the permissible range. The automatic heating system is then active.

The brightness sensor measures the ambient brightness. The BCS automatically controls the background illumination of the screen and the illumination of the keypad.

Pressing the bottom key in the row confirms an input (like “Enter”).

Fig. 5-2:

5-4

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex BCSIII, the start screen The screen displays the graphical user interface of the Board Control System. The basic screen (Fig. 5-3:) appears when all electronic units of the CAMP system have started and when their selftests have been completed.

Note: At low outside temperatures it is possible that the basic screen appears a few minutes after switching on the electrical system (warming up phase).

Starting from this basic screen, the user can access a number of other screens. This does not require an input device such as a keyboard, mouse or similar.

The BCS screen is designed as a touch-screen. By slightly touching the active areas, the user can perform activities such as changing to another screen page.

Active areas are shown on the screen as threedimensional graphics. In the basic configuration – not activated - they seem to project out of the user interface. When touched, they appear to be lowered.

Never use pointed objects such as a ball pen, screwdriver, nail or similar.

This could damage the active surface of the touch-screen.

Do not press on the sensitive areas, just slightly touch them!

Fig. 5-3:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-5

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Information given on the start screen, top section The symbols shown in the top row of the start screen (Fig. 5-4:) appear in grey colour if function is not activated, in green colour if everything is OK or in red if a warning is given. In this case more information is displayed in the red “failure row” below.

6

Operating hours meter.

7

Right engine monitoring.

8

Service station, turns to red colour if lowered. Swinging superstructure or travelling the machine not possible then.

1

Left engine monitoring.

2

Central lubrication system monitoring.

9

3

The number of dumpers you loaded is displayed here (if counted with the key in the right joystick).

Hydraulic ladder, turns to red colour if lowered. Swinging superstructure or travelling the machine not possible then.

10

Track parking brakes monitoring.

4

Connection to Remote Service System (optional).

11

Superstructure holding brakes monitoring.

12

Servo-switch inside seat monitoring.

5

Hydraulic system monitoring.

Fig. 5-4:

5-6

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Information given on the start screen, central section 1

Left engine data during operation: bar = engine oil pressure, Rpm = revolutions per minute, Ltr = fuel in fuel reservoir, red means: top up with fuel soon.

Water = temperature of cooling fluid in degrees Celcius, left arrowhead-shaped symbol slides up and down displaying the current temperature. The symbol showing a halfed arrowhead is a trailing pointer displaying the maximum temperature. Slide to “0” with your fingertip.

2

Hydr. Oil = Hydraulic oil temperature in degrees Celcius, displayed graphically and numerically.

V = on-board voltage, displayed graphically and numerically.

Spanner symbol = operating time until next service is to be due, symbols are red then.

3

Right engine data during operation: bar = engine oil pressure, Rpm = revolutions per minute, Ltr = fuel in fuel reservoir, red means: top up with fuel soon.

Water = temperature of cooling fluid in degrees Celcius, left arrowhead-shaped symbol slides up and down displaying the current temperature. The symbol showing a halfed arrowhead is a trailing pointer displaying the maximum temperature. Slide to “0” with your fingertip.

Fig. 5-5:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-7

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Information given on the start screen, lower section 1

2

Button “Service”.

Tapping with your fingertip opens a gate to much more information about the hydraulic shovel’s current behavior.

A menu will appear where you can select the section you want information about (see chapter “Service screen”).

Button “Setup”.

Tapping with your fingertip opens a login window that permits access to the BCS section that is exclusively for service personnel.

A password is needed to get access.

3

Button “Fault”.

Tapping this button opens a list of failures stored in the failure memory.

A detailed description can be found in the “Technical Handbook”, chapter 9.

4

The red “failure row”.

Here the system displayes detailed information about the failure occurred and gives instructions about what to do.

5

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

6

Clock.

Can be adjusted in the “Setup” section by service personnel.

Fig. 5-6:

5-8

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Information given on the “Service” screen 1

2

3

Tapping on the photo of the engine opens a screen displaying current engine data (see “Engine data screen”).

Same result when tapping on button “Engine” or pressing key “1” on the housing.

Tapping on the photo of the hydraulic pumps opens a screen displaying current hydraulic data (see “Hydraulic data screen”).

Same result when tapping on button “Hydraulic” or pressing key “3” on the housing.

Tapping on the photo of the lubrication control opens a screen displaying current lubrication data (see “Lubrication data screen”).

Same result when tapping on button “Lubrication” or pressing key “5” on the housing.

4

Tapping on the photo of the control lever (joystick) opens a screen displaying control elements adjusting data (see “Controls adjustment data screen”).

Same result when tapping on button “Servosystem” or pressing key “7” on the housing.

5

Tapping on this button opens the “View documents” screen (see: “View documents screen”).

6

Adjusting screen brightness. Sliding the green button sets screen brighter / darker.

Tapping on button “Autom.” sets brightness to automatic mode.

7

Tapping on this button opens the “Signal Table” screen (see: “Signal Table screen”).

8

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

Fig. 5-7:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-9

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Engine data screen This screen displays data of the left engine. Same data for the right engine are available after tapping on the button “right engine”.

1

This section of the screen displays current engine data.

2

Here the oil change interval is displayed as well as the remaining operating hours (h) until the next oil change.

After carrying out oil change tap on button “done”, this resets the graphical oil change bar and the (h) counter.

3

In this section information about faults and malfunctions are displayed. Fault description follows the SAE J1939 standard.

SPN Number = Suspect Parameter Number, FMI = Failure Mode Indentifier.

The “failure row” below displays a failure description.

4

All data displayed can be saved to an USBstick after tapping this button (see: “Saving data to an USB-stick”).

5

Tapping on this button opens a window displaying all the faults / malfunctions the system is able to display (see: “Code Table screen”).

Fig. 5-8:

5-10

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Hydraulic data screen 1

This screen displays data related to the hydraulic system.

2

All data displayed can be saved to an USBstick after tapping this button (see: “Saving data to an USB-stick”).

3

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

Fig. 5-9:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-11

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Lubrication data screen 1

2

This screen displays data related to the central lubrication system.

Here are information about the status of the lubricating system of the upper carriage.

3

Here you get information about the status of the lubricating system of the under carriage.

4

If the system detects faults or malfunctions in the lubrication system of the upper carriage they are marked here with a red dot.

Call the responsible service personnel.

If the system detects faults or malfunctions in the lubrication system of the under carriage they are marked here with a red dot.

Call the responsible service personnel.

5

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

Fig. 5-10:

5-12

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Controls adjustment data screen The characteristic curves of control levers (1, Fig. 5-11:) and control pedals (2) are adjustable by service personnel. The adjusted values are shown here graphically and numerically.

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

If adjustment is needed, call the responsible service personnel.

Adjustment is to be done in the “Setup” section of BCSIII. Access to this area is for service personnel only (password required).

Fig. 5-11:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-13

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex View documents screen Technical documentation for the machine is stored in memory.

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

Tapping on the buttons opens the appropriate pdf file and displays it on the screen by means of the build in viewer.

You can navigate inside the documents using the navigation elements known from other computer usage, like buttons, sliders, links from the contents page and so on.

Fig. 5-12:

5-14

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Signal table screen

1

This is a listing of all the signal sources that are connected to the BCS- and CAMP-system.

In the “Status” column small icons visualize the signal status: green=ok; red=malfunction.

In column “Code” you can find the identifier for the sensor or unit that helps the maintenance personnel to localize the sensor in the electric schematics (in this example the identifier for the sensor is “3B22”) .

To identify and localize sensors and units on the machine, some photos were attached. If you tap on a “Name” and then the button “Location” became readable, a photo is available. Otherwise the button is greyed.

In Fig. 5-13: ID 110 “Main Pump 1/3 Pressure” is marked and button “Location” (1) is readable. When tapping on it, a photo appears and shows where the sensor is located (see Fig. 5-14:).

2

Tapping on button “Diagram” opens a screen showing the data coming from four sensors in a diagram (see Fig. 5-15:).

3

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

Fig. 5-13:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-15

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Signal table screen, location Button “Location” has been tapped, a photo appears showing where the sensor “3B22” is located at the machine.

Fig. 5-14:

5-16

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Signal table screen, diagram

3

Rec = starts recording the data from the selected sources; Stop = stops recording data; Rev = scrolls the diagram in reverse; Fwd = scrolls the diagram forwards.

4

Diagram window, displays the data from four sources as four lines in different colours.

5

Save = save data to memory; Load = load older data from memory; Delete = delete data displayed.

6

Buttons to scroll, scale up, scale down and reset to base setting the diagram window.

7

Select signal source to be displayed (channel 1-4)

8

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

This is a diagram showing the data coming from four signal sources (sensors) for a longer period of time.

The signal sources (channel 1-4) can be selected from a listing after tapping the “Config” button (see: “Signal table screen, diagram configuration”).

1

2

Tapping on button “Config.” opens a window listing all the signal sources available for BCS and CAMP (Fig. 5-16:).

Listing of the four signal sources selected: ID, Name, actual value and value at cursor in the diagram.

Fig. 5-15:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-17

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Signal table screen, diagram configuration Button “Config.” has been tapped, a window appears displaying all the signal sources available.

In column “Channel” you can mark four signal sources whose data you want to display in the diagram (Fig. 5-15:).

Mark the line with the signal source you want and press the appopriate numeric key on the BCS housing: “1” for channel 1; “2”, “3” and “4” for the other channels.

1

For example: This signal source is selected and marked to be displayed on channel 3.

2

For example: This signal source is selected and marked to be displayed on channel 2.

3

Tapping the button will confirm your selection.

4

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

Fig. 5-16:

5-18

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Code table screen

1

Coming from the “Engine data screen” (Fig. 5-8:) after tapping the “Code Table” button.

This screen displays a listing of all available trouble codes according to the SAE J1939 standard.

Active faults or malfunctions are displayed on the “Engine data screen” with their “SPN Number” and their “FMI Number”. To get the description for the fault or malfunction, key in both numbers at (1) and tap on the button left aside.

The appropriate description will be displayed (2).

SPN = Suspect Parameter Number, according to SAE J1939 standard, For example: 94

2

FMI = Failure Mode Identifier, according to SAE J1939 standard, For example: 18

3

Tapping these buttons will scroll the listing: forward, reverse, to beginning, to end.

4

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

Fig. 5-17:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-19

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex BCS III, interfaces The BCS system comes with different data interfaces. This feature allows the communication with external electronic devices.

Three connectors are located on the right-hand side-wall of the control column (Fig. 5-18:): 1

USB 2.0, jack type A. This jack accepts, for example, a USB stick used to save operating data for evaluation on an external computer.

2

Jack D sub, 9 pins.

Used to connect a computer with a diagnosis software with access to the CAN bus.

This connection is reserved for service personnel.

3

Fig. 5-18:

Ethernet, jack type RJ45.

For the connection of future extensions, for example, the remote servicing system.

USB interface, data storage A USB stick can be connected to the USB plug-in connection of type A (1, Fig. 5-18:).

Suitable are such USB sticks that would also work on computers with WINDOWS® operating systems; they may be formatted with the NTFS or the FAT32 file system.

If a screen page displays the symbol of a USB stick, the operating data of this screen page can be saved. The BCS will create a text file.

For a detailed description see: “Saving data to a USB stick”.

5-20

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Saving data to a USB stick All screens which have the “USB-stick-button” (1, Fig. 5-19:) offer the functionality to store data for external use.

All data related to the current screen will be stored to a USB stick. In this example all data from the “Service, left engine” screen will be saved to a file.

Fileformat is RTF (Rich Text Format).

The file name will be automatically created following this pattern: “Shovel type+serial number+screen name.rtf”.

For example:

Save data: Plug a USB stick into the USB jack (see: “BCSIII, interfaces”).

To save the data, tap on button (1, Fig. 5-19:).

The BCS system checks the USB interface before saving the data. If no USB stick is detected, a new window appears showing the folder structure on the CF-card as well as the message “Please plug a USB stick”..

If a USB stick is found, a new window appears, see next page (Fig. 5-20:).

“RH120172_Engine_LH.rtf”.

If this file already exists, an extension with increment numbers will be added to the file name: “RH120172_Engine_LH_(1).rtf”.

“RH120172_Engine_LH_(2).rtf”. ……

Fig. 5-19:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-21

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Saving data to a USB stick, continued This window shows the current data you want to save in a file and askes for confirmation.

If you want to save the data tap on the “Yes” button (1, Fig. 5-20:). The file will be written on the USB stick.

Otherwise tap on the “No” button and return to the screen you want.

If you want to see the files stored on the USB stick, tap on the “Open” button (2).

A new window appear showing the folder / file structure on the USB stick, see next page (Fig. 5-21:).

Fig. 5-20:

5-22

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Saving data to a USB stick, continued This window (Fig. 5-21:) displays the folder / file structure on the USB stick plugged into the USB jack.

Mark the file you want to see by tapping on the filename (2).

Tapping an button “show” (1) opens another window which shows the file.

Tapping the button with the door icon (3) leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

Fig. 5-21:

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-23

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex BCSIII, cleaning

BCSIII, disposal

Clean dirty screens with a soft, slightly moist cloth.

In order to remove persistent dirt, you can use in addition a conventional cleaning agent for LCD monitors.

This electronic device contains substances that might be harmful to the environment.

The electronic components and the tubes of the background illumination contain, for example, lead (Pb) and mercury (Hg).

Never use solving or scouring cleaning agents.

This could damage the surface of the screen.

The background illumination lamps are CCFL-typelamps (Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamps).

Do not use compressed air or water under pressure (high pressure cleaner or steam cleaner).

This could damage the electronic components.

Therefore, this device must not be disposed of with your regular household waste. It must be disposed of properly as electronic scrap.

The battery for backing up the memory contains lithium.

The escaping liquid from a damaged LCD screen may be harmful.

Do not come in contact with escaping liquids. In case of skin contact, wash immediately with water and soap.

5-24

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex TROUBLESHOOTING Instructions on troubleshooting

Layout of the fault table

Faults are often due to the machine not being correctly operated or serviced.

Fault

For this reason, it is vital to read through the relevant section of the operating instructions once again before rectifying any faults.

If you are unable to detect the cause of the fault or to rectify it, apply to the Bucyrus HEX after-sales service.

Describe the fault and all accompanying circumstances as precisely as possible when calling on the Bucyrus HEX after-sales service. Exact data allow for fast troubleshooting.

Never do any jobs for which you are not qualified.

The fault table lists all faults which have been reported to date and outlines their possible causes and rectifying measures. In exceptional cases, a described fault may also have a different cause.

The fault is described here as the outcome of an observation or a previous activity.

Therefore make careful observations.

Study the problem carefully. First think, then act.

Ask yourself the following questions: 

Which warning signals preceded the fault?



What repair and servicing work was carried out previously?



Has this defect already occurred?



Is it one or several simultaneously occurring faults?

Possible causes The possible causes of the observed fault are outlined in this group. They are arranged in order of probability, i.e. the possible cause occurring in most cases heads the list.

Measures This describes the troubleshooting procedure.

Section This specifies where information on troubleshooting is given in the operating instructions. If there is no entry, the Bucyrus HEX after-sales service should be consulted

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-25

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex FAULT TABLES Combustion engine - Fault table Fault Engine fails to start or starts only with difficulty Engine does not turn Engine starts, but runs enevenly or intermittently Engine gets too hot, temperature warning activated Engine not working at full power Engine not working on full cylinder papacity Engine without oil pressure or oil pressure too low Engine oil comsumption too high Engine emits blue smoke Engine emits white smoke Engine emits black smoke Engine cannot be stopped Engine throttled down strongly Cause Oil level too low •

• • •

• • • • •

• •

•

•

•

•

• •

A

Oil level too high

Engine oil level

S

Engine inclination too big

Engine Op. P Instr.

Lubricants W

Fuel quality not corresponding to specification •

Air filter contaminated / turbo-charger defective

Engine Op. W Instr.

Air intake syst. P

Fuel filter contaminated

Fuel filter

•

Charge-air line leaking

• • •

1) Contact the Bucyrus HEX Service

Chapter ref.

Engine oil level

Engine oil of wrong SAE-class

•

Remedial action Check P Adjust E Replace W Top up A Reduce S Clean R

P/W P

•

Radiator / cooling fins contaminated

Cooler cleaning R

•

Cooling fan or water pump defective or loose

Engine Instr.

Op. P/W

•

Cooling air gets too hot / heat buid-up Battery

P

P

•

Battery defective or discharged

•

Cable connections in starter circuit loose or corroded

P

•

Starter defective or pinion not in mesh

P

•

•

•

• • • •

•

•

•

• • • •

•

• •

Incorrect valve setting

• •

Injection valve defective Combustion engine blocked on output side

• •

•

1) Engine Instr.

Injection line leaking

•

5-26

Shut-off relay jamming

• •

• PMS malfunction • Celect coding lamp flashing/lit Celect defective (software error)

Op. E P

Engine Instr.

Op. P/W 1) 1) 1) 1)

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Working hydraulics – Fault table Fault

Remedial action

Working and swing functions not operational No boom function No bucket function No backhoe function No stick function Working movements too slow Power loss in working hydraulics Uncontrolled working movements Cause Electronic excavator control not activated/defective

•

Check Adjust Replace Top up Reduce Clean

P E W A S R

1) Contact the Bucyrus HEX Service Abschnitt Working P

•••••

•

Malfunction of pressure-relief valve

1)

•

•

Servo system pump defective

1)

••••• • •

ECO-power switch in 80%-position

•

Fuel filter contaminated

•

Insufficient engine power

• •

• •

• Malfunction of primary / sencondary pressure-relief valves Engine speed too low

1) P P Fuel filter

P/W

Engine mal- 1) function Hydraulic oil temperatur too high (warning lamp lit, PMS fault indicator Hydraulic oil P/R lamp lit) oil cooler contaminated cooler cleaning Engine coolant temperature too high (warning lamp lit and PMS fault 1) indicator lamp flashing) 1) • Malfunction of solenoid valves 1) • Malfunction of control spool Engine coupling defective

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-27

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Track drive – Fault table Fault

Remedial action

No forward travel and no reversing travel Maximum travel speed cannot be reached Insufficient traction power

•

•

•

• •

• • • • • •

• •

• •

5-28

•

Cause Malfunction of pressure-relief valves

Check Adjust Replace Top up Reduce Clean

P E W A S R

1) Contact the Bucyrus HEX Service Chapter ref.

1)

Servo system pump defective Malfunction of travel valve (pedal) Engine nominal speed too low Malfunction of control spool ECO-power switch in 80%-position Insufficient engine power

1) 1) 1) 1) Travelling P Engine mal- 1) fuction Hydraulic oil temperatur too high (warning lamp lit, PMS fault indi- Hydraulic oil P/R cator lamp lit) oil cooler contaminated cooler cleaning Engine coolant temperature too high (warning lamp lit and PMS 1) fault indicator lamp flashing)

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Swing mechnism – Fault table Fault

Remedial action

No swing possible No righthand or lefthand swinging Swing performance insufficient Uncontrolled swinging movement

Cause Electronic excavator control not activated / defective

• • • • • •

•

• •

• • • • •

Limiting switch optional, hydraulic ladder not complete retracted Superstructure holding brake applied Pressure-relief valve adjusted too low level / defective Servo system pump defective Malfunction in feed-pressure circuit of swing pump Malfunction in high-pressure circuit of swing system Malfuction of moment-regulating valve Malfunction in swing pump displacement cylinder Excessive leakage in swing motor

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Check Adjust Replace Top up Reduce Clean 1) Contact the Bucyrus HEX Service Chapter ref.

Working

P E W A S R

Operation

P P 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)

P

5-29

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex Central lubricating system – Fault table Fault

Remedial action

Grease pump not working, the BCS does not indicate a warning Automatic circuit breaker on Grease pump not working, pilot lamp lit Grease pump working, no grease delivered Greasing pressure too high or too low

• • • •

Cause Timer defective

• • •

•

• • •

• • • • •

5-30

Lines between timer and hydraulic motor defective Hydraulikmotor defektive Grease pump defective Grease sieve clogged Distributor defective Grease container empty Grease pump does not suck grease Leaky lines Non-return valve defective Pressure switch defective

Check P Adjust E Replace W Top up A Reduce S Clean R Vent L 1) Contact the Bucyrus HEX Service Chapter ref.

P/W P/W P/W P/W P/R P/W P/A P/L P/L P/W E

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Vibration data

Detailled information can be found in the „Technical Handbook“ chapter 8 or contact Bucyrus HEX Service.

On the condition that the excavator is used within the limits of its designated use, the installation of seats for drivers in conformity with ISO 7096 ensures that the weighted vibration accelerations awz (measured in compliance with ISO 2631 Part I) fulfill the requirements with respect to the protection against whole-body vibrations in acc. with EC Vibration Directive 2002/44/EG. The vibrations transferred are indicated in acc. with EC Machine Directive 2006/42/EG, Annex I; Section 3.6.3.1, resp. the "Lärm - und Vibrations-Arbeitsschutzverordnung" of 18.12.2008, Section 4.

The effective value of the weighted acceleration to which the whole-body is exposed, does not exceed 0.5 m/s2.

The measurement uncertainty is ±3% (tolerance of the measuring instruments).

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-31

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex ABBREVIATIONS A abt. acc.

Ah API approx.

BA bar Bh CAMP CE CECE

CEN cm cm3/rev CCW CW

Ampere (SI base unit of electric current) about according to Ampere hours (SI base unit of quantity of electricity) American Petroleum Institute approximately = OI = Operating instructions unit of pressure, 1 bar = 14.5 psi = OH = Operating hour Control and Monitoring Platform Communauté Européenne = European community Committee for european Construction Equipment (Defines a measure for bucket, grab or scoop filling) European Standardization Committee centimeter (= 1/100 m) Cubic centimeters per revolution counterclockwise clockwise

dia.

DIN ECM eff. e.g. etc.

Electronic Control Module on engines effective for example etcetera

Fig. FMI

Figure, serial number of illustration Failure Mode Identifier, description malfunctions according to SAE J1939 Falling objects protective structures Rock shovel (working equipment) foot (unit of distance), 1 ft = 0.30 meter

FOPS FS ft gal GLR

Including, inclusive of International Standardization Organization

kg kg/dm3

Kilogram (unit of weight), 1 kg = 2.2 lb Kilograms per cubic decimeter (= unit of specific density) Kilometers per hour KiloNewtons per meter (1 kNm = 1000 Nm) = unit of torque Kilowatt (1 kW = 1.36 hp)

km/h kNm kW

Decibel (sound intensity according to measuring method A) Diameter German Industrial Standard

dB(A)

Incl.

ISO

of

gallon (unit of volume), 1 gal = 3.78 liters Full-load controller (electronic module for PMS)

l lb Lb/in² LC LED l/min LpA LwA

Liter (unit of volume), 1 liter = 0.26 gal pound (unit of mass), 1 lb = 0.45 kg Pounds per square inch (= psi) Long crawler Light-emitting diode Liters per minute Sound pressure at workplace Sound power level of the machine in stationary operation

m MA mA max. min. min-1 mm

Meter (unit of distance), 1 m = 3.28 ft Tightening torque 1 Milliampere (= /1000 A) maximal, maximum minimal, minimum Revolutions per minute Millimeter (=1/1000 m)

N N, kN NLGI NLGI– Klasse Nm No.

Normal, standard version Newton, kiloNewton (unit of force) National Lubricating Grease Institute (USA) Consistency – lubricant classification acc.

To DIN 51 818 Newtonmeter (unit of torque) Number

OH op.inst.

OW

Operating hour Operating instructions Superstructure

oz

ounce (unit of volume) 1 oz = 0.03 liter

HD Hydr.

Heavy duty Hydraulic, Hydraulics

PMS P/No. PS psi

i i.e.

IFN

Transmission ratio

PLC

Pump Managing System Part number Metric horsepower (1 PS = 0.74 kW) pund per sqare inch (unit of pressure), 1 psi = 0.069 bar Programmable logic controller

id est = that is ISO service rating, blocked

Qty.

Quantity

5-32

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex ABBREVIATIONS R, r resp.

RH RTF ROPS rpm

Radius Respectively Crawler hydraulics (excavator) Rich Text Format, textbased file format Roll-over protective structures Revolutions per minute (= min-1)

SAE sec./s.

SN SPN

Society of Aotomotive Engineers (USA) Second Bucyrus HEX partnumber Suspect Parameter Number, description of malfunctions according to SAE J1939 Width across flats

SW t TBG THB TL tm typ.

U/min USB UW V VDMA

Metric ton (= 1000 kg) Civil Engineering Employer’s Liability Insurance Association Technical Handbook Backhoe dipper (attachment) Tons by meters (obsolescent unit of swing torque) Typical Revolutions per minute Universal Serial Bus, interface for fast data exchange Undercarriage Volt (unit of electric voltage) Association of German Machinery and Systems Manufacturers

W

Watt (unit of electric power)

°C °F > <

Degrees Celsius (temperature) Degrees Fahrenheit (temperature) greater than less than

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-33

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex

5-34

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex TECHNICAL DATA

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-35

RH400

8,050 mm (26 ft 5 in)

9,070 mm (29 ft 9 in)

7,800 mm (25 ft 7 in)

7,600 mm (24 ft 11 in)

9,990 mm (32 ft 9 in)

8,800 mm (28 ft 10 in)

7,470 mm (24 ft 6 in)

2,945 mm 3,150 mm (9 ft 8 in) (10 ft 4 in) 1,135 mm (3 ft 9 in) 8,445mm (27 ft 8 in)

2,000 mm (6 ft 7 in)

10,980 mm (36 ft)

8,600 mm (28 ft 3 in)

General Data

Features

Operating Weight

• TriPower shovel attachment

Face Shovel

980 t

1,080 sht

Engine Output SAE J 1995

• Spacious walk-through machine house 3,360 kW

4,500 HP

3

3

Standard Bucket Capacity Face Shovel (SAE 2:1)

• Independent oil cooling system

• 5-circuit hydraulic system • Electronic-hydraulic servo control

52.0 m

68.0 yd

• Board Control System (BCS) • Torque control in closed-loop swing circuit • Automatic central lubrication system • Xenon working light

Product Specification Sheet

RH400 HYDRAULIC MINING EXCAVATOR

Hydraulic Mining Excavator

Operating Weight

Diesel Engines

Shovel

Cummins® QSK60 Tier 2

Standard track pads

2,000 mm (6 ft 7 in)

Make and model

2 x QSK60 2-stage

Operating weight

980,000 kg (2,160,510 lb)

Total rated net power ISO 3046/1

3,360 kW (4,500 HP) 1,800 min-1

Ground Pressure

25.8 N/cm2 (37.4 psi)

Total rated net power SAE J1349

3,360 kW (4,500 HP) 1,800 min-1

Total rated gross power SAE J1995

3,360 kW (4,500 HP) 1,800 min-1

Further track pads on request

No. of cylinders (each engine)

Electrical System (diesel drive) System voltage

24 V

Batteries in series / parallel installation

6 x 210 Ah - 12 V each 630 Ah - 24 V in total

Alternators Working spot lights

• Battery isolation relays • Emergency stop switches accessible from ground level, in engine module and in operator’s cab

Hydraulic Oil Cooling Oil flow of cooling pumps Diesel version Electric version Diameter of fans

159 mm (6.25 in)

Stroke

190 mm (7.48 in)

Displacement

60.2 I (3,674 in3)

Aspiration

2-stage turbocharged; aftercooled and intercooled

2 x 175 A each 12 x high brightness Xenon lights

4 x 975 l/min (4 x 258 US gal/min) 4 x 1,000 l/min (4 x 264 US gal/min) 4 x 1,524 mm (4 x 60 in)

• Cooling system is fully independent of all main circuits, i.e. controlled cooling capacity is available whenever engine is running • Gear-type cooling pumps supplying high-volume, low-pressure oil to aluminum coolers • Fan speed is thermostatically controlled • Extremely high cooling efficiency to ensure optimum oil temperature

Max. altitude without deration

Fuel tank capacity

• Hydraulically driven radiator fan with electronically controlled fan speed • Microprocessed engine control • Automatic rev. reduction • Heavy-duty air- filters with automatic dust evacuation • Two-stage fuel filter incl. water separator • Additional high-capacity water separator • Pre-lube starting system • Eliminator with centrifuge for engine oil filtration • Engine-oil-change interval of 1,000 hours

Hydraulic System with PMS Main pumps

8 x variable flow axial piston pumps Diesel version Electric version

Max. pressure, attachment

Type

Max. pressure, travel

Voltage

3,200 kW

Swing pumps

6.6 kV +/- 10% (other on request)

Max. oil flow

332 A

Total rated current IN Frequency

50 Hz (60 Hz on request)

Revolutions

1,500 min (1,800 min at 60 Hz) -1

-1

Max starting current

780 A

• Custom-made electric motors with increased gap between rotor and stator to withstand severe mining conditions • Power limit control by Pump Management System

Automatic Lubrication System Capacity of grease container

1,000 l (264 US gal)

• Dual-circuit system with hydraulically driven heavy-duty pump and electronic time relay control to adjust the pause / lube times • Connected to the lubrication system are the swing roller bearing with internal gearing and all pivot points of attachment, bucket and cylinders • System failures displayed by Board Control System • Grease filters (200 μm) between service station and container as well as directly behind grease pump

US EPA Tier 4i 15,100 I (4,000 US gal)

Electrical Motors (optional) Total output

4,880 m (16,000 ft) a.s.l.

Emission certification

Max. oil flow

2 x Squirrel cage induction motor

16

Bore

8 x 936 I/min (8 x 247 US gal/min) 8 x 943 I/min (8 x 249 US gal/min) 31 MPa = 310 bar (4,495 psi) 36 MPa = 360 bar (5,220 psi) 6 x reversible swash plate pumps

Diesel version Electric version

Max. pressure, swing circuit

6 x 488 I/min (6 x 129 US gal/min) 6 x 496 I/min (6 x 131 US gal/min) 33 MPa = 330 bar (4,790 psi)

Total volume of hydraulic oil

Approx. 13,000 I (3,450 US gal)

Hydraulic tank capacity

Approx. 10,000 I (2,640 US gal)

• Pump Managing System (PMS) contains: - Electronic load limit control -F low on demand from main pumps depending on joystick position - Automatic regulation of main pumps to zero flow without demand - Automatic rpm reduction of engine speed during working breaks - Reduced oil flow of main pumps at high hydraulic oil temperature or at high engine temperature • Pressure cut-off for main pumps • Cooling of pump transmission gear oil • Filters: - Full-flow high-pressure filters (100 µm) for the main pumps, installed directly behind each pump - High pressure filters (100 µm) for the closed swing circuit - Full-flow filters (10 µm) for the complete return circuit - Full-flow filters (10 µm) for the cooling return circuit - Pressure filters (40 µm and 6 µm) for servo circuit - Transmission oil filters (40 µm)

Undercarriage

Attachments

• Cast double-grouser combined pad-links with bushings connected by hardened full floating pins • All running surfaces of sprockets, idlers, rollers and pad links as well as teeth contact areas of sprocket and pad links are hardened • Fully hydraulic self-adjusting track tensioning system with membrane accumulator • Automatic hydraulic retarder valve to prevent over-speed on downhill travel • Acoustic travel alarm • Idlers, bottom rollers and support rollers are connected to the automatic lubrication system

• Boom and stick are torsion-resistant, welded box design of high tensile steel with massive steel castings at pivot areas • Welding procedures allow for internal counter-welding (double prep weld) wherever possible • Boom and stick are stress-relieved after welding • Inspection hole in boom and stick • Catwalks with rails at boom • Pressure-free lowering of boom and stick by means of a float valve • Shovel attachment with unique TriPower kinematics ensuring the following main features: - Horizontal automatic constant-angle bucket guidance - Vertical automatic constant-angle bucket guidance - Automatic roll-back limiter to prevent material spillage - Kinematic assistance to hydraulic forces - Constant boom momentum throughout the whole lift arc - Crowd force assistance • All buckets are equipped with a universal wear package suitable for all standard applications, which consists of: - Special liner material covering main wear areas inside and outside of bucket - Lip shrouds between teeth - Wing shrouds on side walls - Heel shrouds at bottom edges - Special wear packages for highly abrasive materials on request

Operator’s Cab

Swing System

Travel speed (2 stages)

1 stage 2nd stage st

Max. tractive force

Max. 1.6 km/h (0.99 mph) Max. 2.2 km/h (1.37 mph) 4,338 kN (442 t = 974,880 lb)

Gradability of travel drives

Max 44%

Track pads (each side)

48

Bottom rollers (each side)

7

Support rollers (each side)

2 plus a skid plate in between

Travel drives (each side) Parking brake

1 planetary transmission with 2 two-stage axial piston motors Wet multiple disc brake, spring-applied / hydraulically released

Operator’s eye level Internal dimensions of cab

Internal dimensions of amenity cab

approx. 8.8 m (28 ft 10 in) Length Width Height

2,200 mm (7 ft 3 in) 1,600 mm (5 ft 3 in) 2,150 mm (7 ft 1 in)

Length Width Height

1,600 mm (5 ft 3 in) 1,600 mm (5 ft 3 in) 2,150 mm (7 ft 1 in)

• Pneumatically cushioned and multi-adjustable comfort seat with lumbar support, safety belt, head and arm rests • Safety switch in seat cushion to neutralize automatically the hydraulic controls when operator leaves the seat • Joystick controls integrated in independently adjustable seat consoles • Fold-away auxiliary seat with safety belt •F OPS (rock guard; approved acc. to DIN ISO 3449) integrated into cab structure • All-round safety glass, armored windshield and sliding side window • Windshield with parallel intermittent wiper / washer • Roller blind at windshield • Robust instrument panel incl. large colored BCS screen with transflective technology • Board Control System (BCS) electronic monitoring and data logging system for vital signs and service data of engines, hydraulic and lubrication system • Machine access via retractable boarding ladder, hydraulically operated

Retractable Service Station Retractable service station installed underneath the engine module and easily accessible from ground.

Equipped with: • Quick couplings for: - Diesel fuel - Engine coolant - left / right - Pump transmission gear oil - left / right - Engine oil (oil pan) - left / right - Engine oil (additional tank - optional) - left / right - Hydraulic oil tank - Grease container • CAT jump start socket • Indicator lights for fuel tanks left / right full and grease container full

Swing Drives

6 compact planetary transmissions with axial piston motors

Parking Brakes

Wet multiple disc brake, spring-loaded / hydraulically released

Max. swing speed

Diesel version Electric version

Swing ring

3.9 rpm 4.1 rpm Triple race roller bearing with sealed internal gearing

• Closed-loop swing circuit with torque control • Hydraulic braking of the swing motion by counteracting control • All race ways of swing ring as well as grease bath for internal gearing supplied by automatic central lubrication system

Optional Equipment General • Export crating • Finishing as per end user’s corporate colors • Customizing of logos as per customer’s specification

Superstructure • Hydraulic service crane on superstructure with auxilliary engine • Mesabi radiators instead of standard radiators • 2nd retractable boarding ladder on right-hand side of engine module • Various cold-weather packages • Additional lighting

Cab • Various heating and air-conditioning systems • Outside-mounted sun shields • Additional instrumentation

Undercarriage • Track-pad width 1,800 mm Further optional equipment on request

TriPower Face Shovel Attachment (FS) Working Diagram - Boom 9.5 m (31 ft 2 in) - Stick 5.8 m (19 ft) m 21 ft 65 20 19 60 18

55 17 16 50 15 45

14

13 40 12 35

11 10

30 25 20 15 10 5 0 5 10

9

400 sht

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3

21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 65

60

55

50

45

Working Range

40

35

8

30

7

25

6

5

20

15

4

3 10

2

1 5

0 m 0 ft

Face Shovels

Max. digging height

20.2 m

66 ft 3 in

Type

Iron ore shovel

Heavy rock shovel

Oil sand shovel

Std. rock shovel

Max. digging reach

19.0 m

62 ft 4 in

Tooth system

on request

on request

on request

on request

Max. digging depth

2.3 m

7 ft 7 in

Max. dumping height

14.5 m

47 ft 7 in

Capacity SAE / PCSA 1:1

43.5 m3 (56.9 yd3)

48.4 m3 (63.3 yd3)

52.0 m3 (68.0 yd3)

59.8 m3 (78.2 yd3)

Crowd distance on level

6.2 m

20 ft 4 in

Capacity SAE / CECE 2:1

37.0 m³ (48.4 yd³)

42.0 m³ (54.9 yd³)

45.0 m³ (58.9 yd³)

52.0 m³ (68.0 yd3)

Total width

5,600 mm (18 ft 4 in)

5,600 mm (18 ft 4 in)

5,610 mm (18 ft 5 in)

6,170 mm (20 ft 3 in)

Inner width

5,100 mm (16 ft 9 in)

5,100 mm (16 ft 9 in)

5,175 mm (17 ft)

5,600 mm (18 ft 4 in)

2,700 mm (8 ft 10 in)

2,700 mm (8 ft 10 in)

2,560 mm (8 ft 5 in)

2,650 mm (8 ft 8 in)

Digging Forces Max. crowd force

3,300 kN

741,610 lb

Max. crowd force at ground level

3,200 kN

719,140 lb

Opening width

Max. breakout force

2,400 kN

539,350 lb

No. of teeth

6

6

6

6

Weight incl. universal wear kit

77,000 kg (169,750 lb)

79,500 kg (175,270 lb)

82,000 kg (180,780 lb)

84,000 kg (185,190 lb)

Max. material density (loose)

2.6 t/m3 (4,380 lb/yd3)

2.2 t/m3 (3,710 lb/yd3)

2.0 t/m3 (3,370 lb/yd3)

1.8 t/m3 (3,030 lb/yd3)

Effective Date: January 2011. Product specifications and prices are subject to change without notice or obligation. The photographs and/or drawings in this document are for illustrative purposes only. Refer to appropriate Operator’s Manual for instructions on the proper use of this equipment.

Failure to follow the appropriate Operator’s Manual when using our equipment or to otherwise act irresponsibly may result in serious injury or death. The only warranty applicable to our equipment is the standard written warranty applicable to the particular product and sale and Bucyrus makes no other warranty, express or implied. Bucyrus is a registered trademark of Bucyrus International, Inc. in the USA and many other countries.

Copyright 2011 Bucyrus International, Inc.

S_SHO_RH400_11_1_E

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex

5-36

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex NOTES .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. ..............................................................................................................................................................................

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

5-37

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Annex

5-38

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Index 6 INDEX Operating instructions

Target group

Part 1 INTRODUCTION FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 2 OPERATION

Operating personnel The operating personnel must have knowhow relevant to the operation and the application of this or comparable machines.

Part 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING Part 4 REPAIR WORK

Inspection and servicing personnel The inspection and servicing personnel must have know-how relevant to the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

Repair personnel The repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to the repair of this or comparable machines.

Part 5 ANNEX

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 6 INDEX

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

6-1

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Index

6-2

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Index

A ABBREVIATIONS............................................5-32 About this Operating Instructions ......................1-3 Access ladder lighting .....................................2-18 Activating the electronic excavator control......2-88 After daily operation.........................................2-92 Air conditioner (optional) .................................2-75 Air-intake lines .................................................3-59 AIR-INTAKE SYSTEM.....................................3-55 Alternator - Instructions ...................................3-65 Appropriate disposal of batteries.....................4-14 ASSEMBLING WORKING EQUIPMENT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ...........................2-93 Automatic fire-extinguishing system................2-29 Automatic fire-extinguishing system (optional.2-30 Automatic reset to idling ....................................2-9 Avoid mixing of different hydraulic fluids3-29, 3-89

B Back-up heating (option), filling in fuel ............2-63 Back-up heating (optional) ..............................2-77 Back-up heating driver’s cab (optional)...........2-76 Battery .............................................................3-69 Battery storage ............................................. 3-123 BCS III, interfaces............................................5-20 BCS III, what’s that? ..........................................5-3 BCSIII, cleaning...............................................5-24 BCSIII, disposal ...............................................5-24 BCSIII, the start screen .....................................5-5 Bearing races ............................................... 3-108 Before starting work.........................................2-88 Board-control-system ........................................5-3 Board-Control-System (BCS) ............................2-9 Braking the superstructure ..............................2-89 Breather filter ....................................... 3-82, 3-112 Bypass valves (filter housing - cooling system)3-81 Bypass valves (hydraulic oil reservoir) ............3-79

C CENTRAL LUBRICATING ........................... 3-110 Central lubricating system – Fault table ..........5-30 Changing the engine oil...................................3-41 Changing the gearbox oil .................... 3-96, 3-101 Changing the hydraulic oil ...............................3-89 Changing the hydraulic oil return-flow (hydraulic oil reservoir ..............................................3-77 Charging batteries inside the machine, safety instructions...................................................3-71 Checking cooling-liquid level ...........................3-50 Checking the gas charging pressure in the pressure accumulator .................... 3-107, 3-120 Checking the gearbox oil level / Topping up with oil ..........................................................3-96 Checking the greasing pressure .................. 3-113 BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Checking the hydraulic oil level ...................... 3-75 Checking/cleaning the filter elements............. 3-88 Cleaning the fuel tanks ................................... 3-63 Cleaning the hydraulic oil cooler..................... 3-93 Code table screen........................................... 5-19 Cold-starting fluid (ether) – Replacing the pressure vessel .................................................. 3-48 Combustion engine - Fault table..................... 5-26 confined spaces - Safety instructions ............... 4-4 Control and Monitoring Platform (CAMP) ......... 2-8 Controls adjustment data screen.................... 5-13 Cooling liquid change ..................................... 3-52 COOLING SYSTEM ....................................... 3-49 Corrosion protection for pins and bearings (bushings and hubs).................................... 2-95 CRAWLER TRACKS .................................... 3-104

D Demand control / Zero-flow regulation ............. 2-9 Depressurizing the hydraulic system.............. 3-74 DESCRIPTION OF THE hydraulic shovel ........ 2-6 Design........................................................... 3-110 Designated use ................................................. 1-5 Designated use, unauthorized use ................... 1-6 Dismantling and removal instructions............. 4-12 Disposal at the end of the service life............. 4-12 Disposing of the machine without polluting the environment................................................. 4-12 Drive.................................................................. 2-8 Driver’s seat .................................................... 2-26 Dust collection................................................. 3-59

E Electrical circuit diagrams ............................... 3-65 Electrical system ............................................... 2-9 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.................................. 3-65 Electrical system - Safety instructions ............ 3-65 Electrical system switch-cabinets ................... 3-65 Electronic excavator control............................ 3-94 Eliminator filter and centrifuge ........................ 3-46 Emergency exit in driver’s cab and escape ladder .......................................................... 2-21 Emergency lowering of the equipment ........... 2-91 Emergency shut-off function ........................... 2-24 Engine........................................................... 3-117 ENGINE .......................................................... 3-38 Engine - Safety instructions ............................ 3-38 Engine 1 (LH), control and monitoring............ 2-41 Engine 2 (RH), control and monitoring ........... 2-43 Engine data screen......................................... 5-10 Engine oil reservoir, changing the oil.............. 3-43 Engine oil reservoir, checking the oil level...... 3-40 Engine oil, checking the oil level / topping up. 3-39 Engines – adjusting the speed ....................... 2-73 Engines, emergency shut-off .......................... 2-69

6-3

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Index Entering and leaving the machine, Safety instructions......................................................2-18 Equipment .................................................... 3-118 Extract from the German regulations ........... 3-120

F FAULT TABLES ..............................................5-26 Filling ............................................................ 3-112 Filling quantities - Grease................................3-25 Filling quantities - oil ........................................3-28 Filling quantities - other ...................................3-28 Filter (control circuit) ........................................3-83 Fire and explosion hazard ....................... 1-13, 2-5 Fluid grease for idlers, track rollers and support rollers ....................................................3-36 Folding ladder (optional)..................................2-20 Fuel filters, draining water ...............................3-62 Fuel preheating system (optional) ...................2-71 FUEL SYSTEM................................................3-60 Fuel system - Safety instructions ....................3-60 Fuel tank, replace breather filter......................3-63 Function ........................................................ 3-111 Further hazardous substances........................4-13 Further machine documentation........................1-3

G Gas, dust, steam and smoke...........................1-11 Gearbox - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil ............................................ 3-100, 3-102 Gearbox venting .................................. 3-98, 3-101 Grease filter replace (Filling the grease container) ........................................................ 3-115 Grease filter replace (Grease lines) ............. 3-116 Greases for bearings and swing rings.............3-35

H Harness (optional ............................................2-31 High-pressure filter for working hydraulics ......3-84 High-pressure filters for feeding circuits and swing pumps ................................................3-87 High-pressure filters for pump-flushing circuit.3-86 High-pressure filters for swing circuit ..............3-88 High-pressure filters for the servo circuit.........3-85 Hose line for oil and cooling liquid changes ....3-37 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ..................5-31 Hydraulic data screen......................................5-11 Hydraulic equipment........................................1-12 Hydraulic hoses – Instructions ..........................4-7 Hydraulic shovel layout......................................2-7 Hydraulic system ...............................................2-8 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ....................................3-74 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ......................................4-7 Hydraulic system - Safety instructions ............3-74

I 6-4

Information given on the ................................... 5-9 Information given on the start screen, central section ........................................................... 5-7 Information given on the start screen, lower section ........................................................... 5-8 Information given on the start screen, top section................................................................. 5-6 Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions .. 3-3 Inspection and Servicing plans - Instructions ... 3-9 inspection and servicing work, Fire and Explosion Hazard ................................................... 3-7 INSPECTION PLAN - OIL .............................. 3-26 Inspection plan – Oil (legend) ......................... 3-27 Instructions on troubleshooting....................... 5-25

L LADDERS (optional)..................................... 3-119 Layout of the fault table .................................. 5-25 Lighting systems in LED technonogy, instructions ............................................................. 3-68 LUBRICANTS / consumables......................... 3-29 LUBRICATING CHART – GREASE ............... 3-24 Lubricating chart – Grease (legend) ............... 3-25 Lubrication data screen .................................. 5-12

M Main filter elements......................................... 3-55 Measures ........................................................ 5-25 MONITORING, WARNING AND CONTROL ELEMENTS ................................................. 2-34

N Noise emission information............................... 1-7 Notes................................. 1-15, 2-99, 3-125, 5-37 NOTES............................................................ 4-15 Notes on the selection of oils and greases..... 3-29

O Oilfilter for hydraulic circuit grease pump replace.......................................................... 3-114 Oils for combustion engines and compressors3-30 Oils for hydraulic system (selection)............... 3-31 Oils for pump distribution gearboxes .............. 3-32 Oils for swing gearboxes ................................ 3-33 Oils for travel gearboxes................................. 3-34 ON-BOARD CRANE (OPTIONAL) ................. 2-96 On-Board crane, – blocking the boom in position of rest.................................................... 2-98 On-board crane, checking .............................. 2-98 On-Board crane, checking tightness of fastening bolts ..................................................... 3-122 On-board crane, drive unit ............................ 3-121 On-board crane, drive unit .............................. 2-97 On-board crane, lubricating .......................... 3-122

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Index On-board crane, monitoring, warning and control elements ................................................2-96 On-board crane, putting into operation ...........2-97 Operating Instructions, where to store it in the driver’s cab.....................................................2-4 Operation - Safety instructions ..........................2-3 Organizational measures ..................................1-8 Other elements on the front side .......................5-4 OTHER MAINTENANCE.............................. 3-117

P Plan A - E.........................................................3-17 Plan N ..............................................................3-13 Plan T and W...................................................3-15 Plan V ..............................................................3-11 Possible causes...............................................5-25 Pre-chambers ..................................................3-98 Preface ..............................................................1-3 Preheating system for engine and hydraulic oil (optional) ......................................................2-70 Preliminary gearbox - Draining off oil ........... 3-103 Pressure accumulator - Emergency lowering .3-95 PRESSURE ACCUMULATORS - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ............................................4-8 Pressure-accumulator inspection regulations3-107 Pressure-accumulator inspection regulations3-120 PUMP TRANSFER GEARBOX.......................3-96 Pump transfer gearbox lube oil filters..............3-99 Putting the hydraulic shovel out of operation 3-123 PUTTING THE hydraulic shovel OUT OF OPERATION AND RECOMMISSIONING ..... 3-123 PUTTING THE MACHINE INTO OPERATION2-62

R Radiators .........................................................3-50 Recommissioning ......................................... 3-123 Reducing operators exposure to vibrations.....2-28 Reducing the operator's exposure to noise.....2-62 Refuelling.........................................................2-62 Repair instructions.............................................4-7 Repair work - Safety instructions.......................4-3 repair work, ENGINE .........................................4-6 repair work, Fire and Explosion Hazard ............4-5 Replacing lamps and bulbs .............................3-65 Replacing the fuel filters ..................................3-60 Replacing the hydraulic oil return-flow filters (filter housing) ..............................................3-80 Replacing the oil filters ....................................3-45 Risk of deflagrations ........................................4-12 Risk of fire........................................................4-12

S Safety filter element.........................................3-58 Safety instructions governing specific operational phases..................................................1-9 Saving data to a USB stick ..............................5-21 Saving data to a USB stick, continued .. 5-22, 5-23 BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN

Section ............................................................ 5-25 Securing the machine ..................................... 2-94 Selection and qualification of personnel; basic responsibilities............................................... 1-9 Service station (tanklift) .................................. 2-63 SERVICING WORK........................................ 3-37 Shutting off the engines .................................. 2-74 Shutting off the supply voltage (battery main switch) ......................................................... 2-25 Signal table screen ......................................... 5-15 Signal table screen, diagram .......................... 5-17 Signal table screen, diagram configuration .... 5-18 Signal table screen, location........................... 5-16 Signs ............................................................... 2-10 Special work in conjunction with utilization of the machine and maintenance and repairs as well as troubleshooting during work; disposal of parts and consumables ................. 1-10 Starting and stopping the engines .................. 2-72 Starting the engines........................................ 2-72 Starting the engines at low temperatures ....... 2-73 Superstructure .................................................. 2-8 Superstructure basic position ......................... 2-80 Superstructure holding brake ......................... 2-84 SWING GEARBOX ....................................... 3-100 Swing mechnism – Fault table........................ 5-29 SWING RING................................................ 3-108 Swing ring - Instructions ............................... 3-108 Swinging ladder .............................................. 2-19 Swinging the superstructure ........................... 2-89 Switchgear cabinet ......................................... 3-72 Switching the cab interior lighting on and off .. 2-22 Switching the electrical system on and off...... 2-69 Switching the maintenance lights on and off .. 2-23

T TECHNICAL DATA......................................... 5-35 The keys on the front side ................................ 5-4 Topping up cooling-liquid................................ 3-51 Track drive – Fault table ................................. 5-28 Track parking brake ........................................ 2-84 Track tensioner ............................................. 3-105 Trainer's / instructor's seat.............................. 2-28 Transport - Safety instructions........................ 2-85 Transporting the machine ............................... 2-85 TRAVEL GEARBOX ..................................... 3-102 Travel gearbox - Changing the oil ................ 3-102 TRAVELLING.................................................. 2-80 Travelling forwards/backwards ....................... 2-80 TRAVELLING, SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS2-78, 2-79 TROUBLESHOOTING.................................... 5-25

U Unblocking a grease line .............................. 3-113 Undercarriage ................................................... 2-8 USB interface, data storage............................ 5-20

6-5

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6090 / RH400 Index V Venting the hydraulic system ..........................3-92 Vibration data ..................................................5-31 Vibration information..........................................1-7 View documents screen ..................................5-14

W Warning of special dangers.............................1-11 Warnings and symbols ......................................1-5 Warranty ............................................................1-4

6-6

Water filter change.......................................... 3-54 Welding and flame cutting works - Safety instructions ....................................................... 4-9 Windscreen washer ........................................ 2-28 Working........................................................... 2-90 Working hydraulics – Fault table .................... 5-27 WORKING OPERATION ................................ 2-88 Working operation - Safety instructions.......... 2-86

X Xenon floodlight projector, replacing the lamp 3-66

BA RH400(3 725 058.00)-EN